CXD3048R [SONY]

CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo + Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost; CD数字信号处理器,内置数字伺服+防震内存控制器+数字高和低音增强
CXD3048R
型号: CXD3048R
厂家: SONY CORPORATION    SONY CORPORATION
描述:

CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo + Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost
CD数字信号处理器,内置数字伺服+防震内存控制器+数字高和低音增强

内存控制器 数字信号处理器 CD
文件: 总205页 (文件大小:1481K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
CXD3048R  
CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo +  
Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost  
Description  
The CXD3048R is a digital signal processor LSI for CD  
players. This LSI incorporates a digital servo, high & bass  
boost, shock-proof memory controller, 1-bit DAC and  
analog low-pass filter.  
120 pin LQFP (Plastic)  
Features  
All digital signal processing during playback is  
performed with a single chip  
Highly integrated mounting possible due to a built-in RAM  
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Block  
Supports CAV (Constant Angular Velocity) playback  
Frame jitter free  
0.5× to 4× speed continuous playback possible  
Allows relative rotational velocity readout  
Wide capture range playback mode  
Spindle rotational velocity following method  
Supports 1× to 4× speed playback  
Supports variable pitch playback  
The bit clock, which strobes the EFM signal, is  
generated by the digital PLL.  
Digital Filter, DAC and Analog Low-pass Filter Blocks  
Digital dynamic bass boost and high boost  
Bass Boost: 4th-order IIR 24dB/Oct  
+10dB/+14dB/+18dB/+22dB  
High Boost: Second-order IIR 12dB/Oct  
+4dB/+6dB/+8dB/+10dB  
Independent turnover frequency selection possible  
Bass Boost: 125Hz/160Hz/200Hz  
EFM data demodulation  
Enhanced EFM frame sync signal protection  
Refined super strategy-based powerful error correction  
C1: double correction, C2: quadruple correction  
Supported during 4× speed playback  
Noise reduction during track jumps  
Auto zero-cross mute  
Subcode demodulation and subcode-Q data error  
detection  
Digital spindle servo  
High Boost: 5kHz/7kHz  
Digital dynamics (compressor)  
Volume increased by +5dB at low level  
8× oversampling digital filter  
(attenuation: 61dB, ripple within band: ±0.0075dB)  
Digital signal output possible after boost  
Serial data format selectable from (output) 20 bits/  
18 bits/16 bits (rearward truncation, MSB first)  
Digital attenuation: – , –60 to +6dB, 2048 steps (linear)  
Soft mute  
16-bit traverse counter  
Asymmetry correction circuit  
CPU interface on serial bus  
Digital de-emphasis  
High-cut filter  
Error correction monitor signal, etc. output from a new  
CPU interface  
Servo auto sequencer  
Applications  
CD players  
Fine search performs track jumps with high accuracy  
Digital audio interface outputs  
Digital level meter, peak meter  
Structure  
Silicon gate CMOS IC  
Bilingual compatible  
VCO control mode  
CD TEXT data demodulation  
Digital Out can be generated from the audio serial  
input. (also supported after shock-proof and digital  
bass boost processing, subcode-Q addition function)  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Supply voltage VDD, AVDD  
Input voltage VI  
Output voltage VO  
Storage temperature Tstg  
Supply voltage difference  
AVSS – VSS  
Vss – 0.5 to +3.5  
Vss – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3  
Vss – 0.3 to VDD + 0.3  
–55 to +150  
V
V
V
°C  
–0.3 to +0.3  
V
Digital Servo (DSSP) Block  
AVDD – VDD  
AVDD – VDD  
–0.3 to +0.3V (AVDD < 1.7V)  
–0.3 to +1.0V (AVDD = 1.7 to 2.7V)  
Microcomputer software-based flexible servo control  
Offset cancel function for servo error signal  
Auto gain control function for servo loop  
E:F balance, focus bias adjustment functions  
Surf jump function supporting micro two-axis  
Tracking filter: 6 stages  
Recommended Operating Conditions  
Supply voltage  
VDD, AVDD0, 3, XVDD  
AVDD1, 2, DVDD  
Operating temperature Topr  
1.7 to 2.7  
VDD to 2.7  
–20 to +75  
V
V
°C  
Focus filter: 5 stages  
Shock-proof Memory Controller Block  
Supports an external 4M-bit/16M-bit DRAM  
Time axis-based data linking  
ADPCM compression method (uncompressed/4 bits/  
6 bits/8 bits)  
I/O Pin Capacitance  
Input capacitance  
Output capacitance  
CI  
CO  
7 (max.)  
7 (max.)  
VDD = VI = 0V  
fM = 1MHz  
pF  
pF  
Note) Measurement conditions  
Sony reserves the right to change products and specifications without prior notice. This information does not convey any license by  
any implication or otherwise under any patents or other right. Application circuits shown, if any, are typical examples illustrating the  
operation of the devices. Sony cannot assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits.  
– 1 –  
E02653A37  
CXD3048R  
Block Diagram  
TES1  
TEST  
XRST  
Clock  
Error  
Generator  
Corrector  
LRCK  
BCK  
Selector  
EFM  
demodulator  
D/A  
Interface  
RFAC  
ASYI  
ASYO  
BIAS  
PCMD  
Asymmetry  
Corrector  
Digital  
OUT  
DOUT  
32K  
RAM  
XPCK  
FILO  
FILI  
A0 to A11  
D0 to D3  
Sub Code  
Processor  
Digital  
PLL  
XEMP  
XWIH  
XQOK  
XRAS  
XWE  
PCO  
CLTV  
Shock-proof  
Memory  
Controller +  
Compression/  
Expansion  
MDP  
Digital  
CLV  
PWMI  
XCAS  
XWRE  
XRDE  
XSOE  
SENS  
DATA  
XLAT  
CPU  
Interface  
SYSM  
LRMU  
LRCKI  
BCKI  
CLOK  
SCOR  
SBSO  
EXCK  
SQSO  
SQCK  
Servo  
Auto  
Sequencer  
DAC  
PCMDI  
HPL  
Signal  
Processor  
Block  
HPR  
Memory Controller,  
Bass Boost Block  
AOUT1  
VREFL  
LPF  
AOUT2  
VREFR  
LPF  
Servo Block  
SCLK  
COUT  
SSTP  
ATSK  
SERVO  
Interface  
MIRR  
DFCT  
FOK  
MIRR  
DFCT  
FOK  
RFDC  
CE  
SERVO DSP  
PWM GENERATOR  
TE  
FFDR  
FRDR  
TFDR  
TRDR  
SFDR  
SRDR  
FOCUS PWM  
GENERATOR  
OPAmp  
Analog SW Converter  
A/D  
SE  
FOCUS SERVO  
FE  
TRACKING PWM  
GENERATOR  
TRACKING  
SERVO  
VC  
IGEN  
SLED PWM  
GENERATOR  
SLED SERVO  
– 2 –  
CXD3048R  
Pin Configuration  
90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61  
91  
92  
60  
SE  
FE  
VSS1  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
TEST  
93  
VC  
TES1  
94  
VSS2  
FRDR  
FFDR  
TRDR  
TFDR  
SRDR  
SFDR  
SSTP  
MDS  
MDP  
C176  
VDD2  
LRCK  
LRCKI  
PCMD  
PCMDI  
BCK  
AVDD2  
AOUT2  
VREFR  
AVSS2  
AVSS1  
VREFL  
AOUT1  
AVDD1  
XVSS  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
XTAO  
47 XTAI  
46 XVDD  
45 HVDD  
44 HPR  
43 HPL  
42 HVSS  
41 XTSL  
40 EXCK  
39 SBSO  
38 XWIH  
37 XEMP  
36 SQSO  
35 SCLK  
34 SQCK  
33 VSS0  
32 R4M  
31 XWRE  
BCKI  
DVDD  
A3  
A2  
A1  
A0  
A10  
A11  
TEST3  
TEST4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30  
– 3 –  
CXD3048R  
Pin Description  
Power Pin  
supply No.  
Symbol I/O Value  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
XRAS  
XWE  
D1  
1, 0 DRAM row address strobe signal.  
O
O
1, 0 DRAM data input enable signal.  
1, 0 DRAM data bus 1.  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
O
D0  
1, 0 DRAM data bus 0.  
D3  
1, 0 DRAM data bus 3.  
D2  
1, 0 DRAM data bus 2.  
TEST1  
TEST2  
XCAS  
Test pin. Do not connect.  
Test pin. Do not connect.  
O
9
1, 0 DRAM column address strobe signal.  
1, 0 WFCK output. XOE is output by switching with the command.  
1, 0 DRAM address 9.  
O
DRAM  
I/F  
10 WFCK  
11 A9  
O
O
12 A8  
1, 0 DRAM address 8.  
O
13 A7  
1, 0 DRAM address 7.  
O
14 DVSS  
15 A6  
DRAM interface GND.  
O
1, 0 DRAM address 6.  
1, 0 DRAM address 5.  
1, 0 DRAM address 4.  
16 A5  
O
17 A4  
O
DRAM readout enable signal input. XRDE monitor is output by switching  
with the command.  
18 XRDE  
19 VDD0  
20 CLOK  
21 DATA  
22 SENS  
1, 0  
I/O  
I
Digital power supply.  
Serial data transfer clock input from CPU. SQSO and SENS readout  
clocks are output by switching with the command.  
Serial data input from CPU.  
I
SENS output to CPU. SQSO data is output by switching with the  
command.  
1, Z, 0  
O
Latch input from CPU. The serial data is latched at the falling edge. XLAT  
which is low for 6µs or more is enabled.  
23 XLAT  
I
24 XSOE  
25 SYSM  
Clock input mode switching from CPU. Valid when $A4 ENXSOE = 1.  
Mute input. Muted when high.  
I
I
Digital  
Word clock output f = 2Fs. GRSCOR is output by switching with the  
command.  
26 WDCK  
27 SCOR  
1, 0  
1, 0  
O
O
High output when the subcode sync is detected. SCOR, which is  
interpolated in the IC, is output by switching with the command.  
28 XRST  
29 PWMI  
System reset. Reset when low.  
I
I
Spindle motor external control input.  
Subcode Q OK input. XQOK monitor is output by switching with the  
command.  
30 XQOK  
31 XWRE  
1, 0  
1, 0  
I/O  
I/O  
DRAM write enable signal input. XWRE monitor is output by switching  
with the command.  
– 4 –  
CXD3048R  
Power Pin  
supply No.  
Symbol I/O Value  
Description  
Microcomputer clock output. R8M and C4M are output by switching with  
the command.  
32 R4M  
1, 0  
O
33 Vss0  
34 SQCK  
35 SCLK  
Digital GND.  
SQSO readout clock input.  
SENS serial data readout clock input.  
I
I
Subcode Q 80-bit and PCM peak and level data output. CD TEXT data  
output.  
36 SQSO  
1, 0  
O
Digital  
37 XEMP  
38 XWIH  
39 SBSO  
40 EXCK  
1, 0 DRAM readout prohibited signal.  
1, 0 Write to DRAM prohibited signal.  
1, 0 Subcode P to W serial output.  
SBSO readout clock input.  
O
O
O
I
Crystal selection input. Low when the crystal is 16.9344MHz; high when  
the crystal is 33.8688MHz.  
41 XTSL  
I
42 HVSS  
43 HPL  
44 HPR  
45 HVDD  
46 XVDD  
Headphone GND.  
O
1, 0 Lch headphone PDM output.  
1, 0 Rch headphone PDM output.  
H/P  
O
Headphone power supply.  
Master clock power supply.  
Crystal oscillation circuit input. The master clock is externally input from  
this pin.  
47 XTAI  
I
X'tal  
48 XTAO  
49 XVSS  
Crystal oscillation circuit output.  
Master clock GND.  
O
50 AVDD1  
51 AOUT1  
52 VREFL  
53 AVSS1  
54 AVSS2  
55 VREFR  
56 AOUT2  
57 AVDD2  
58 TES1  
59 TEST  
60 VSS1  
Analog power supply.  
O
O
O
O
I
Analog Lch analog output.  
Lch  
Analog Lch reference voltage.  
Analog GND.  
Analog GND.  
Analog Rch reference voltage.  
Analog Rch analog output.  
Rch  
Analog power supply.  
Test pin. Normally GND.  
Test pin. Normally GND.  
Digital GND.  
I
OR signal output of Lch, Rch "0" detection flag (AND output) and SYSM.  
Only "0" detection flag is output by switching with the command.  
61 LRMU  
1, 0  
O
Digital  
62 DOUT  
63 ATSK  
64 DFCT  
65 FOK  
1, 0 Digital Out output.  
O
1, 0 Anti-shock input/output.  
1, 0 Defect signal input/output.  
1, 0 Focus OK signal input/output.  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
– 5 –  
CXD3048R  
Power Pin  
supply No.  
Symbol I/O Value  
Description  
Mirror signal input/output.  
66 MIRR  
1, 0  
1, 0  
I/O  
I/O  
Track number count signal input/output. SCOR is output by switching with  
the command.  
67 COUT  
C2PO output. MNT3 and GTOP are output by switching with the  
command.  
68 C2PO  
69 GFS  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
O
O
O
Digital  
GFS output. MNT2 and XROF are output by switching with the command.  
XUGF output. MNT0, RFCK, C4M and QRCVD are output by switching  
with the command.  
70 XUGF  
XPCK output. MNT1, FSTO and GTOP are output by switching with the  
command.  
71 XPCK  
1, 0  
O
Digital power supply.  
72 VDD1  
73 PCO  
74 FILI  
O
I
Master PLL charge pump output.  
Master PLL filter input.  
1, Z, 0  
Master PLL (slave = digital PLL) filter output.  
Multiplier VCO1 control voltage input.  
Wide-band EFM PLL VCO2 control voltage input.  
Wide-band EFM PLL charge pump output.  
Analog GND.  
75 FILO  
76 CLTV  
77 VCTL  
78 VPCO  
79 AVSS3  
80 ASYO  
81 ASYI  
82 BIAS  
83 AVDD3  
84 RFAC  
85 AVDD0  
86 IGEN  
87 AVSS0  
88 RFDC  
89 CE  
Analog  
O
I
I
1, Z, 0  
O
O
I
ASYM  
EFM full-swing output (low = Vss, high = VDD).  
Asymmetry comparator voltage input.  
Asymmetry circuit constant current input.  
Analog power supply.  
1, 0  
I
I
EFM signal input.  
Analog power supply.  
I
Operational amplifier constant current input.  
Analog GND.  
I
RF signal input.  
Center servo analog input or E input.  
Tracking error signal input or F input.  
Sled error signal input or B input.  
Focus error signal input or A input.  
Center voltage input.  
I
A/D  
90 TE  
I
91 SE  
I
92 FE  
I
93 VC  
I
Digital GND.  
94 VSS2  
95 FRDR  
96 FFDR  
97 TRDR  
98 TFDR  
99 SRDR  
100 SFDR  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Focus drive output.  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
Focus drive output.  
Digital  
Tracking drive output.  
Tracking drive output.  
Sled drive output.  
Sled drive output.  
– 6 –  
CXD3048R  
Power Pin  
supply No.  
Symbol I/O Value  
Description  
Disc innermost detection signal input.  
101 SSTP  
102 MDS  
I
Spindle drive output.  
1, Z, 0  
1, Z, 0  
O
O
Spindle motor servo control output.  
103 MDP  
104 C176  
Digital  
176.4kHz output. 88.2kHz for quasi-double speed setting.  
Low output when XRST = low.  
1, 0  
O
Digital power supply.  
105 VDD2  
106 LRCK  
107 LRCKI  
108 PCMD  
109 PCMDI  
110 BCK  
111 BCKI  
112 DVDD  
113 A3  
O
I
D/A interface. LR clock output f = Fs.  
D/A interface. LR clock input.  
D/A interface. Serial data output. (two's complement, MSB first)  
D/A interface. Serial data input. (two's complement, MSB first)  
D/A interface. Bit clock output.  
D/A interface. Bit clock input.  
DRAM interface power supply.  
DRAM address 3.  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
1, 0  
DRAM  
I/F  
DRAM address 2.  
114 A2  
DRAM address 1.  
115 A1  
DRAM address 0.  
116 A0  
DRAM address 10.  
117 A10  
DRAM address 11. Write prohibition factor is input by switching with the  
command.  
118 A11  
1, 0  
I/O  
Test pin. Do not connect.  
Test pin. Do not connect.  
119 TEST3  
120 TEST4  
O
O
Notes) • PCMD is a MSB first, two's complement output.  
GTOP is used to monitor the frame sync protection status. (High: sync protection window released.)  
XUGF is the frame sync obtained from the EFM signal, and is negative pulse. It is the signal before  
sync protection.  
XPCK is the inverse of the EFM PLL clock. The PLL is designed so that the falling edge and the  
EFM signal transition point coincide.  
The GFS signal goes high when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.  
RFCK is derived from the crystal accuracy, and has a cycle of 136µs.  
C2PO represents the data error status.  
XROF is generated when the 32K RAM exceeds the ±28 frame jitter margin.  
C4M is a 4.2336MHz output that changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.  
R8M is the 8.4672MHz output.  
FSTO is the 2/3 frequency-division output of the XTAI pin.  
SOUT is the serial data output inside the servo block.  
SOCK is the serial data readout clock output inside the servo block.  
XOLT is the serial data latch output inside the servo block.  
– 7 –  
CXD3048R  
Monitor Pin Output Combinations  
Command bit  
Output data  
MONSEL SRO1 MTSL1 MTSL0  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
XUGF  
MNT0  
RFCK  
C4M  
XPCK  
MNT1  
XPCK  
FSTO  
SOCK  
GTOP  
GFS  
C2PO  
MNT3  
GTOP  
C2PO  
C2PO  
C2PO  
COUT  
COUT  
COUT  
COUT  
COUT  
SCOR  
MIRR  
MIRR  
MIRR  
MIRR  
MIRR  
MNT2  
XROF  
GFS  
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
SOUT  
QRCVD  
XOLT  
GFS  
—: don't care  
– 8 –  
CXD3048R  
Electrical Characteristics  
1. DC Characteristics (VDD1 = 2.5 ± 0.2V, VDD2 (logic) = 1.8 ± 0.1V, DVSS = VSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Applicable  
pins  
Typ. Max. Unit  
Item  
Conditions  
Min.  
1.7  
VIH  
VIL  
Vt+  
Vt–  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
Input voltage  
(1)  
13, 15  
V
0.7  
1.7  
Input voltage  
(2)  
0.7  
V
14  
Schmitt input  
Vt+ –  
Vt–  
Hysteresis  
0.4  
VOH  
VOL  
IOH = –4mA  
IOL = 4mA  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
2.0  
Output  
voltage  
12, 13  
V
0.4  
VIN = VSS or  
VDD  
15  
13  
II (1)  
II (2)  
µA  
µA  
–10  
–10  
10  
10  
Input leak current (1)  
Input leak current (2)  
VIN = VSS or  
VDD  
(VDD = AVDD = 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Applicable  
Typ. Max. Unit  
Item  
Conditions  
Min.  
pins  
Input voltage  
(1)  
VIH (1)  
VIL (1)  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
1.7  
1, 2,  
V
3,  
6,  
4
0.7  
Input voltage  
(2)  
V
7
VIN (2) Analog input  
Vt+  
Input voltage  
VSS  
1.7  
VDD  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
Input voltage  
(3)  
Vt–  
0.7  
V
5
Schmitt input  
Vt+ –  
Vt–  
Hysteresis  
0.4  
VOH (1) IOH = –4mA  
VOL (1) IOL = 4mA  
VOH (2) IOH = –2mA  
VOL (2) IOL = 2mA  
VOH (3) IOH = –0.28mA  
VOL (3) IOL = 0.36mA  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
2.0  
2.0  
2, 8,  
Output  
voltage (1)  
V
10, 15  
0.4  
Output  
voltage (2)  
9
V
0.4  
VDD – 0.5  
0
VDD  
Output  
voltage (3)  
11  
V
0.4  
1, 3,  
VIN = VSS or  
Input leak current (1)  
Input leak current (2)  
Input leak current (3)  
II (1)  
VDD  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
–10  
–10  
–40  
–10  
10  
10  
40  
10  
5,  
6
VIN = VSS or  
2,  
4
II (2)  
VDD  
VIN = 0.25VDD  
II (3)  
7
to 0.75VDD  
Tri-state output leak current  
(when high impedance)  
VO = VSS or  
VDD  
10  
IOZ  
– 9 –  
CXD3048R  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Applicable  
Typ.  
Max. Unit  
Item  
Conditions  
Min.  
pins  
Input voltage  
(1)  
VIH (1)  
VIL (1)  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
0.65VDD  
1, 2,  
V
3,  
6,  
4
0.35VDD  
Input voltage  
(2)  
V
7
VIN (2) Analog input  
Vt+  
Input voltage  
VSS  
VDD  
High level input voltage  
Low level input voltage  
0.65VDD  
Input voltage  
(3)  
Vt–  
0.35VDD  
V
5
Schmitt input  
Vt+ –  
Vt–  
Hysteresis  
0.4  
VOH (1) IOH = –2.4mA  
VOL (1) IOL = 2.4mA  
VOH (2) IOH = –1.4mA  
VOL (2) IOL = 1.4mA  
VOH (3) IOH = –0.28mA  
VOL (3) IOL = 0.36mA  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
High level output voltage  
Low level output voltage  
VDD – 0.4  
VDD  
V
2, 8,  
Output  
voltage (1)  
10, 16  
0
0.4  
VDD – 0.4  
VDD  
V
0.4  
Output  
voltage (2)  
9
0
VDD – 0.5  
0
VDD  
V
0.4  
Output  
voltage (3)  
11  
1, 3,  
VIN = VSS or  
Input leak current (1)  
Input leak current (2)  
Input leak current (3)  
II (1)  
VDD  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
–10  
–10  
–40  
–10  
10  
10  
40  
10  
5,  
6
VIN = VSS or  
2,  
4
II (2)  
VDD  
VIN = 0.25VDD  
II (3)  
7
to 0.75VDD  
Tri-state output leak current  
(when high impedance)  
VO = VSS or  
VDD  
10  
IOZ  
Applicable pins  
1
TEST, TES1  
2
COUT, MIRR, DFCT, FOK, XQOK, XWRE, ATSK  
SYSM, DATA, XSOE, XTSL  
3
4
5
6
7
8
SSTP, PWMI  
SQCK, EXCK, XRST, CLOK, SCLK, XLAT  
VCTL, FILI, CLTV, ASYI, IGEN, BIAS  
RFDC, CE, TE, SE, FE, VC  
XEMP, XWIH, SQSO, SBSO, XUGF, XPCK, GFS, C2PO, SCOR, WDCK, SFDR, SRDR, TFDR, TRDR,  
FFDR, FRDR, ASYO, DOUT, C176  
9
R4M  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SENS, MDP, VPCO, PCO, MDS  
FILO  
A0 to A10, XRAS, XCAS, XWE, WFCK, LRCK, BCK, PCMD  
D0 to D3, XRDE, A11  
LRCKI, BCKI  
PCMDI  
HPL, HPR  
– 10 –  
CXD3048R  
2. AC Characteristics  
(1) XTAI pin  
(a) When using self-excited oscillation  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
fMAX  
Min.  
7
Typ.  
Max.  
34  
Unit  
Oscillation  
frequency  
MHz  
(b) When inputting pulses to XTAI pin  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
Min.  
13  
Typ.  
Max.  
500  
Unit  
ns  
High level pulse  
width  
t
t
t
WHX  
WLX  
CX  
Low level pulse  
width  
13  
26  
500  
ns  
ns  
V
Pulse cycle  
1000  
Input high level  
Input low level  
0.7VDD  
VIHX  
VILX  
0.2VDD  
10  
V
Rise time,  
fall time  
ns  
t
R, t  
F
t
CX  
t
WLX  
tWHX  
V
IHX  
V
IHX × 0.9  
XTAI  
V
DD/2  
V
IHX × 0.1  
V
ILX  
t
R
tF  
Note) When the pulse is input to the XTAI pin, be sure to input it via the capacitor.  
– 11 –  
CXD3048R  
(2) CLOK, DATA, XLAT, SQCK and EXCK pins  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
Clock frequency  
Symbol  
fCK  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
0.65  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
t
t
t
t
t
WCK  
SU  
H
Clock pulse width  
750  
300  
300  
300  
750  
30000  
Setup time  
ns  
Hold time  
ns  
D
Delay time  
30000  
0.65  
65  
ns  
WL  
Latch pulse width  
ns  
fT  
EXCK SQCK frequency  
EXCK SQCK pulse width  
COUT frequency (during input)  
COUT pulse width (during input)  
MHz  
ns  
t
WT  
750  
7.5  
fT  
kHz  
µs  
t
WT  
Only when $44 and $45 are executed.  
1/fCK  
WCK  
t
tWCK  
CLOK  
DATA  
XLAT  
tWSC  
tH  
t
SU  
t
D
tWL  
EXCK  
SQCK  
COUT  
t
WT  
tWT  
1/fT  
SBSO  
SQSO  
t
SU  
tH  
(3) R4M pin (when $A4X CKOUTSL2 = CKOUTSL1 = 0)  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
Output frequency  
Output duty  
Symbol  
fOUT  
Min.  
Typ.  
4.2336  
50  
Max.  
Unit  
MHz  
%
DOUT  
VOUT  
Output amplitude  
VDD  
V
– 12 –  
CXD3048R  
(4) SCLK pin  
XLAT  
SCLK  
t
DLS  
tSPW  
. . .  
. . .  
1/fSCLK  
Serial Read Out Data  
(SENS)  
MSB  
LSB  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
SCLK frequency  
SCLK pulse width  
Delay time  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
16  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
fSCLK  
t
SPW  
DLS  
31.3  
15  
t
µs  
(5) COUT, MIRR and DFCT pins  
Operating frequency  
(VDD = AVDD = 1.8 ± 0.1V and 2.5 ± 0.2V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Topr = –20 to +75°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
fCOUT  
Min.  
40  
Typ.  
Max.  
Unit Conditions  
COUT maximum  
operating frequency  
1
kHz  
MIRR maximum  
operating frequency  
2
fMIRR  
40  
5
kHz  
DFCT maximum  
operating frequency  
3
fDFCTH  
kHz  
1
When using a high-speed traverse TZC.  
2
B
A
When the RF signal continuously satisfies the following conditions during the above traverse.  
A = 0.11VDD to 0.23VDD  
B
A + B  
25%  
3
During complete RF signal omission.  
When settings related to DFCT signal generation are Typ.  
– 13 –  
CXD3048R  
1-bit DAC and LPF Block Analog Characteristics  
(VDD = AVDD = 2.6V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = +25°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
THD  
Conditions  
Crystal  
384Fs  
768Fs  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
0.016  
0.016  
Unit  
%
0.009  
0.009  
Total harmonic  
distortion  
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,  
20kHz LPF  
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,  
AMUT OFF (Using A-weighting  
filter 20kHz LPF)  
384Fs  
768Fs  
92  
92  
94  
94  
Signal-to-noise  
ratio  
S/N  
dB  
Fs = 44.1kHz in all cases.  
The total harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio measurement circuits are shown below.  
22µF  
100  
AOUT1 (2)  
VREFL (R)  
Audio Analyzer  
100kΩ  
2200pF  
1µF  
LPF external circuit diagram ($A560C400 PDMSEL = 1)  
768Fs/384Fs  
Rch  
Lch  
A
B
DATA  
RF  
Audio Analyzer  
TEST DISC  
CXD3048R  
Block diagram of analog characteristics measurement  
(VDD = AVDD = 2.6V, VSS = AVSS = 0V, Ta = +25°C)  
Item  
Symbol  
Min.  
640  
10  
Typ.  
658  
Max.  
Unit  
mVrms  
kΩ  
Applicable pins  
1
VOUT  
Output voltage  
1
2
RL  
Load resistance  
CVREF  
VREF pin capacitance  
1
µF  
Measurement is conducted for the above circuit diagrams with the sine wave output of 1kHz and 0dB.  
Applicable pins  
1
AOUT1, AOUT2  
2
VREFL, VREFR  
– 14 –  
CXD3048R  
Contents  
[1] CPU Interface  
§1-1. CPU Interface Timing...................................................................................................................... 16  
§1-2. CPU Interface Command Table ...................................................................................................... 16  
§1-3. CPU Command Presets ................................................................................................................. 32  
§1-4. Description of SENS Signals .......................................................................................................... 43  
§1-5. Description of Commands .............................................................................................................. 45  
[2] Subcode Interface  
§2-1. P to W Subcode Readout ............................................................................................................. 101  
§2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout ........................................................................................................... 101  
[3] Description of Modes  
§3-1. CLV-N Mode .................................................................................................................................. 108  
§3-2. CLV-W Mode ................................................................................................................................. 108  
§3-3. CAV-W Mode................................................................................................................................. 108  
§3-4. VCO-C Mode ................................................................................................................................ 109  
[4] Description of Other Functions  
§4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit ........................................................................... 112  
§4-2. Frame Sync Protection ................................................................................................................. 114  
§4-3. Error Correction ............................................................................................................................ 114  
§4-4. DA Interface .................................................................................................................................. 115  
§4-5. Digital Out ..................................................................................................................................... 118  
§4-6. Servo Auto Sequence ................................................................................................................... 124  
§4-7. Digital CLV .................................................................................................................................... 132  
§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed ................................................................................................... 133  
§4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits ............................ 133  
§4-10. DAC Block Input Timing ................................................................................................................ 134  
§4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions............................................................................................. 135  
§4-12. LPF Block...................................................................................................................................... 140  
§4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions.................................................. 141  
§4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function ................................................................................................... 146  
§4-15. Asymmetry Correction .................................................................................................................. 150  
§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation....................................................................................................... 151  
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands  
§5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System ............................................................ 153  
§5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK)...................................................................................... 154  
§5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG Measurement and Compensation] ...................................................... 155  
§5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function ................................................................................................ 156  
§5-5. FCS Bias Adjustment Function..................................................................................................... 156  
§5-6. AGCNTL Function......................................................................................................................... 158  
§5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search ........................................................................................................ 160  
§5-8. TRK and SLD Servo Control ........................................................................................................ 161  
§5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation ............................................................................................. 162  
§5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit ..................................................................................................... 163  
§5-11. Anti-shock Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 163  
§5-12. Brake Circuit ................................................................................................................................. 164  
§5-13. COUT Signal................................................................................................................................. 165  
§5-14. Serial Readout Circuit................................................................................................................... 165  
§5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM ........................................................................................................... 166  
§5-16. PWM Output ................................................................................................................................. 166  
§5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal ...................................................................... 167  
§5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets .................................................................................... 167  
§5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients..................................................................................................... 195  
§5-20. Filter Composition ......................................................................................................................... 197  
§5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response ........................................................................... 203  
[6] Application Circuit.................................................................................................................................. 204  
Explanation of abbreviations  
AVRG: Average  
AGCNTL: Auto gain control  
FCS: Focus  
TRK: Tracking  
SLD: Sled  
DFCT: Defect  
– 15 –  
CXD3048R  
[1] CPU Interface  
§1-1. CPU Interface Timing  
CPU interface  
This interface uses DATA, CLOK and XLAT to set the modes.  
The interface timing chart is shown below. (See 2. AC Characteristics in Electrical Characteristics, for the  
details of the AC characteristics.)  
750ns to 30µs  
CLOK  
D0  
D1  
D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23  
DATA  
750ns or more  
(6µs or more  
when $AAX  
MLAT ON)  
XLAT  
Valid  
Registers  
The internal registers are initialized by a reset when XRST = 0.  
§1-2. CPU Interface Command Table  
Total bit length for each register  
Register  
Total bit length  
8 bits  
0 to 2  
3
8 to 24 bits  
16 bits  
4 to 6  
7
8
20 bits  
32 bits  
9
32 bits  
A
B
C
D
E
32 bits  
28 bits  
28 bits  
28 bits  
20 bits  
– 16 –  
Command Table ($0X to 1X)  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Command  
ter  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FOCUS SERVO ON  
(FOCUS GAIN  
NORMAL)  
1
0
FOCUS SERVO ON  
(FOCUS GAIN  
DOWN)  
1
0
0
1
0
FOCUS SERVO OFF,  
0V OUT  
FOCUS  
0
0 0 0 0  
CONTROL  
FOCUS SERVO OFF,  
FOCUS SEARCH  
VOLTAGE OUT  
1
FOCUS SEARCH  
VOLTAGE DOWN  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
FOCUS SEARCH  
VOLTAGE UP  
ANTI SHOCK ON  
ANTI SHOCK OFF  
BRAKE ON  
1
0
1
0
1
BRAKE OFF  
0
TRACKING  
CONTROL  
1
0 0 0 1  
TRACKING GAIN  
NORMAL  
TRACKING GAIN UP  
1
TRACKING GAIN UP  
FILTER SELECT 1  
TRACKING GAIN UP  
FILTER SELECT 2  
0
—: don't care  
Command Table ($2X to 3X)  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Command  
ter  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TRACKING SERVO  
OFF  
0
0
0
1
0
0
TRACKING SERVO  
ON  
FORWARD TRACK  
JUMP  
1
0
REVERSE TRACK  
JUMP  
1
1
TRACKING  
CONTROL  
2
0 0 1 0  
SLED SERVO OFF  
SLED SERVO ON  
0
1
FORWARD SLED  
MOVE  
1
0
REVERSE SLED  
MOVE  
1
1
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
SLED KICK LEVEL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(±1 × basic value) (default)  
SLED KICK LEVEL  
(±2 × basic value)  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
SLED KICK LEVEL  
(±3 × basic value)  
SLED KICK LEVEL  
(±4 × basic value)  
—: don't care  
Command Table ($340X)  
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3  
Address 4  
Data 1  
D6 D5  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
KRAM DATA (K00)  
SLED INPUT GAIN  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KRAM DATA (K01)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K02)  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K03)  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K04)  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K05)  
SLED OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K06)  
FOCUS INPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K07)  
SLED AUTO GAIN  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 0 0  
KRAM DATA (K08)  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K09)  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K0A)  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K0B)  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K0C)  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K0D)  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K0E)  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K0F)  
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
Command Table ($341X)  
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3  
Address 4  
Data 1  
D6 D5  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
KRAM DATA (K10)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K11)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K12)  
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K13)  
FOCUS AUTO GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K14)  
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K15)  
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K16)  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K17)  
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN LOW PASS FILTER B  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 0 1  
KRAM DATA (K18)  
FIX  
KRAM DATA (K19)  
TRACKING INPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K1A)  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K1B)  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K1C)  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K1D)  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K1E)  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K1F)  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
Command Table ($342X)  
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3  
Address 4  
Data 1  
D6 D5  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
KRAM DATA (K20)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K21)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K22)  
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K23)  
TRACKING AUTO GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K24)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K25)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K26)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K27)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 1 0  
KRAM DATA (K28)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K29)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K2A)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K2B)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K2C)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K2D)  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K2E)  
Not used  
KRAM DATA (K2F)  
Not used  
Command Table ($343X)  
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3  
Address 4  
Data 1  
D6 D5  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
KRAM DATA (K30)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
SLED INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with SFSK = 1)  
KRAM DATA (K31)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K32)  
Not used  
KRAM DATA (K33)  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K34)  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K35)  
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K36)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K37)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 1 1  
KRAM DATA (K38)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K39)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K3A)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K3B)  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K3C)  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
KRAM DATA (K3D)  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
KRAM DATA (K3E)  
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K3F)  
Not used  
Command Table ($344X)  
Address 1 Address 2 Address 3  
Address 4  
Data 1  
D6 D5  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
KRAM DATA (K40)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K41)  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K42)  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K43)  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K44)  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K45)  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K46)  
TRACKING HOLD INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with THSK = 1)  
KRAM DATA (K47)  
Not used  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 1 0 0  
KRAM DATA (K48)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K49)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H  
KRAM DATA (K4A)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L  
KRAM DATA (K4B)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H  
KRAM DATA (K4C)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L  
KRAM DATA (K4D)  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
KRAM DATA (K4E)  
Not used  
KRAM DATA (K4F)  
Not used  
Command Table ($348X to 3FX)  
Address 1 Address 2  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
PGFS PGFS PFOK PFOK  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Address 3  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
0
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
MRS MRT1 MRT0  
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC  
DOUT  
1
0
1
0
A/D COPY EMPH CAT DOUT DOUT DOUT WIN DOUT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEL EN  
D
b8  
EN1 DMUT WOD EN EN2  
SFBK SFBK  
LB1 LB2 LB2  
0
0
0
0
Booster Surf Brake  
Booster  
1
2
SN  
SN SM  
THB FHB TLB1 FLB1 TLB2  
ON ON ON ON ON  
HBST HBST LB1S LB1S LB2S LB2S  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
IDF IDF IDF IDF  
DF IDFT IDFT  
LPDF INV  
0
0
0
DFCT  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
SL3 SL2 SL1 SL0  
SLS  
1
0
0
RFDC  
Address 3  
Data 1  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
Data 2  
D6 D5  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
1
0
0
0
1
0
FBL9 FBL8 FBL7 FBL6 FBL5 FBL4 FBL3 FBL2 FBL1  
FB9 FB8 FB7 FB6 FB5 FB4 FB3 FB2 FB1  
FCS Bias Limit  
FCS Bias Data  
1
1
1
1
TV9 TV8 TV7 TV6 TV5 TV4 TV3 TV2 TV1 TV0 Traverse Center Data  
—: don't care  
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.  
Address 1  
Address 2  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
D6 D5  
Data 4  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D4  
D3  
D0  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
FT1 FT0 FS5 FS4 FS3 FS2 FS1 FS0 FTZ FG6 FG5 FG4 FG3 FG2 FG1 FG0 FCS search, AGF  
TDZC DTZC TJ5 TJ4 TJ3 TJ2 TJ1 TJ0 SFJP TG6 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 TG1 TG0 TRK jump, AGT  
FZSH FZSL SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 AGS AGJ AGGF AGGT AGV1 AGV2 AGHS AGHT FZC, AGC, SLD move  
VCLM VCLC FLM FLC0 RFLM RFLC AGF AGT DFSW LKSW TBLM TCLM FLC1 TLC2 TLC1 TLC0 DC measure, cancel  
DAC SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0  
FIF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Serial data readout  
FCS Bias, Gain,  
Surf jump / brake  
0
1
1
1
FBONFBSS FBUP FBV1 FBV0  
TJD0 FPS1 FPS0 TPS1 TPS0 SVDA SJHD INBK MTI0  
ZC  
FPG FPG TPG TPG  
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Gain  
S1  
0
S0  
0
S1  
0
S0  
0
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
1
0
1
0
UD  
FOCUS  
FZC  
1
1
1
1
0
SRQ1 SRQ0  
ASYO  
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
SFO2 SFO1 SDF2 SDF1 MAX2 MAX1 SFOX BTF D2V2 D2V1 D1V2 D1V1 RINT  
0
0
0
Mirr, DFCT, FOK  
TZC, COUT, Bottom,  
MIRR  
COSSCOTS CETZ CETF COT2 COT1 MOT2  
0
BTS1 BTS0 MRC1 MRC0  
0
0
SFID SFSK THID THSK ABEF TLD2 TLD1 TLD0 SDF6 SDF5 SDF4 SDF3  
SLD filter  
F1NM F1DM F3NM F3DM T1NM T1UM T3NM T3UM DFIS TLCD  
0
LKIN COIN MDFI MIRI XT1D Filter  
0
AGG4 XT4D XT2D  
0
DRR2DRR1 DRR0  
0
ASFG FTQ  
1
SRO1  
0
AGHF ASOT Clock, others  
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.  
Address 1  
Address 2  
Address 3  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20  
D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
FI  
D6  
D5  
D4  
FI  
D3  
FI  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FI  
FI  
FI  
FI  
FI  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0  
FFS  
System GAIN  
FZB3 FZB2 FZB1 FZB0 FZA3 FZA2 FZA1 FZA0  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
1
1
1
1
FSUD  
0
1
0
0
FFS5 FFS4 FFS3 FFS2 FFS1 FFS0 FOCUS  
UP  
Command Table ($4X to EX)  
Address  
D2 D1  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Regis-  
Command  
ter  
D3  
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
4
5
Auto sequence  
0
0
1
1
0
0
AS3  
AS2  
TR2  
AS1  
AS0  
MT3  
MT2  
0
MT1  
MT0  
LSSL  
0
0
Blind (A, E),  
Brake (B),  
1
0
1
TR3  
SD3  
TR1  
SD1  
TR0  
SD0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
2
1
Overflow (C, G)  
Sled KICK,  
BRAKE (D),  
KICK (F)  
6
7
0
0
1
1
1
1
SD2  
KF3  
2048  
KF2  
KF1  
512  
KF0  
256  
0
4
Auto sequence (N)  
track jump  
32768 16384 8192 4096  
1024  
128  
64  
32  
16  
count setting  
MODE  
CD- DOUT DOUT  
WSEL  
VCO  
VCO  
VCO1  
CS0  
8
9
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
ASHS SOCT0  
KSL3 KSL2 KSL1 KSL0  
0
1
0
0
0
1
specification  
ROM Mute Mute-F  
SEL2  
SEL1  
Function  
DSPB ASEQ  
BiliGL BiliGL  
MAIN SUB  
1
1
FLFC  
0
0
0
0
0
0
specification  
ON-OFF ON-OFF  
—: don't care  
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
ter  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Audio CTRL  
Signal select  
0
1
Mute  
ATT  
PCT1 PCT2  
RSL1 RSL0  
SOC2  
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
DTSL1 DTSL0 MCSL1 MCSL0  
0
AD7  
1
SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
ZMUTA SMUT AD10 AD9  
DAC HiCut  
AD8  
AD6  
AD5  
AD4  
BST  
PDM  
SEL  
PWDN ZDPL WOC  
OBIT1 OBIT0  
EMPH FILTER CL  
0
1
0
1
Bass boost  
BBST BBST  
Vdwn1 Vdwn0  
BBON1 BBON0 HBON1 HBON0 BBSL1 BBSL0 HBSL1 HBSL0  
COMP  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AD7  
1
0
1
AD5  
1
0
AD4  
0
ON  
1
SMUT AD10 AD9  
DAC HiCut  
AD8  
AD6  
BST  
PDM  
SEL  
A
1
0
1
0
PWDN ZDPL XWOC  
EMPH FILTER CL  
0
1
1
0
Headphone  
BBST BBST  
Vdwn1 Vdwn0  
BBON1 BBON0 HBON1 HBON0 BBSL1 BBSL0 HBSL1 HBSL0  
COMP  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
ON  
SL  
SL  
GTOP NOLIM SPSL  
XOE  
OUT  
Shock-proof  
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
READ2 REFSEL REFON  
SDTO  
MSL2 MSL1 MSL0  
memory setting  
XQOK XWRE CHECK WDCK COM  
Shock-proof  
XQOK XWRE XRDE XSOEO XSOEO2 ADDRST  
0
OUT  
memory control  
DOUT subcode-Q  
setting  
SubQA3 SubQA2 SubQA1 SubQA0  
0
1
0
0
0
SubQD7 SubQD6 SubQD5 SubQD4  
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
DRWR DRADR  
0
DRD15 DRD14 DRD13 DRD12  
DRAM I/F  
DADR19 DADR18 DADR17 DADR16 DADR15 DADR14 DADR13 DADR12  
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Address  
D2 D1  
Data 1  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
ADPON BITSL1 BITSL0  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D3  
D0  
D3  
1
D2  
D1  
1
D0  
0
D3  
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Compression  
setting  
ADP  
WO  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
GRSEL  
EFM playability  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
ARDTEN  
AVW  
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
enhancement setting  
Sync expansion  
specification  
SFP5 SFP4 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0  
A
1
0
1
0
DSP DSSP ASYM ESP  
LPF DSUB ASEQ  
HCAV ERCNT  
SLEEP SLEEP  
Sleep setting  
ADCPS  
PCOL  
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP  
Variable pitch  
setting  
VARI VARI WTC SCSY SENS SENS SENS SENS  
ON USE C2PO (sub) SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0  
Spindle servo  
setting  
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 MDP  
MDP  
MDS  
CTL  
MDP  
0
MDP  
LPWR2  
32  
0
EA  
EA  
EA  
EA OUTSL1 OUTSL0  
UP  
CTL4  
Traverse monitor  
counter setting  
B
C
D
E
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
32768 16384 8192 4096  
Gain Gain Gain Gain  
2048  
1024  
512  
256  
128  
64  
16  
8
4
2
1
Spindle servo  
Gain  
Gain  
PCC1 PCC0 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0 SRP3 SRP2 SPR1 SRP0  
coefficient setting  
MDP1 MDP0 MDS1 MDS0 DCLV1 DCLV0  
Gain  
VP  
VP  
CLV CTRL  
SPD mode  
0
TB  
TP  
VP7  
VP6  
VP5  
VP4  
VP3  
VP2  
VP1  
VP0  
0
0
0
CLVS  
CTL1 CTL0  
Gain  
Gain  
INV  
CM3  
CM2  
CM1  
CM0 EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON  
CAV1 CAV0  
VPCO  
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Data 5  
D2 D1  
SCSY SOCT1 TXON TXOUT OUTL1 OUTL0  
Data 6  
Data 7  
Regis-  
Command  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
ter  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D2 D1  
D0  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
D0  
0
MODE  
SCOR  
SEL  
8
1 0 0 0  
1 0 0 1  
ERC4  
0
0
OUTL2  
specification  
Function  
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DIV4  
0
0
specification  
0 0  
0
0
0
0
AUDIO CTRL  
Signal select  
EN CKOUT CKOUT SLD  
max  
max  
max  
max  
max  
max  
max  
max  
0 1 0 0  
XSOE  
SL2  
SL1  
BBIN C2PO7 C2PO6 C2PO5 C2PO4 C2PO3 C2PO2 C2PO1 C2PO0  
0 0 1  
0 1  
AD3  
AD2  
AD1  
AD0  
0
setup  
0
0
0
0
1
0
Bass boost  
0 1 0 1  
BBST BBST BBST BBST  
1 0  
Vup1  
Vup0  
Uth  
Lth  
PDM  
INV  
1 1  
0
0
0
0
A
1 0 1 0  
0 0 1  
0 1  
AD3  
0
AD2  
1
AD1  
0
AD0  
0
Headphone  
0 1 1 0  
BBST BBST BBST BBST  
1 0  
Vup1  
Vup0  
Uth  
Lth  
PDM  
INV  
1 1  
0
0
0
0
ADDRST  
SEL  
STA  
SEL  
XWI  
H2  
XWI SPSL WQR  
H1 COM MON  
A11  
SEL  
READ READ MON  
S2 S1 SEL  
Shock-proof  
0 1 1 1  
1 0 0 1  
ADRMO  
0
memory setting  
DOUT subcode-Q  
setting  
0 0 0 0  
SubQD3 SubQD2 SubQD1 SubQD0  
—: don't care  
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Data 5  
D2 D1  
Data 6  
D2 D1  
Data 7  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
Command  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
ter  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
DRD11 DRD10 DRD9 DRD8 DRD7 DRD6 DRD5 DRD4 DRD3 DRD2 DRD1 DRD0  
1 1 1 0  
1 1 1 1  
1 0 0 1  
DRAM I/F  
DADR11 DADR10 DADR9 DADR8 DADR7 DADR6 DADR5 DADR4 DADR3 DADR2 DADR1 DADR0  
ADPCM ADPCM  
Compression  
setting  
1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 1  
0
ORMU  
0
0
0
0
SE  
L
MUTE  
1 0 1 0  
A
EFM playability  
enhancement  
setting  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Sync expansion  
specification  
REF  
1 1 0 0  
1 1 1 1  
OV3  
OV2  
OV1  
OV0  
SLIM1 SLIM0 OV4  
MDP MDP MDP  
SEL2  
Spindle servo  
setting  
MDP  
CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0  
Traverse monitor  
counter setting  
B
C
D
1 0 1 1  
1 1 0 0  
1 1 0 1  
0
0
MTSL1 MTSL0 ASYE MD2  
0
0
Spindle servo  
EDC7 EDC6 EDC5 EDC4 EDC3 EDC2 EDC1 EDC0  
coefficient setting  
CLV CTRL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—: don't care  
§1-3. CPU Command Presets  
Command Preset Table ($0X to 34X)  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FOCUS  
FOCUS SERVO OFF,  
0V OUT  
0
1
2
0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 1  
0 0 1 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
CONTROL  
TRACKING  
CONTROL  
TRACKING GAIN UP  
FILTER SELECT 1  
TRACKING  
MODE  
TRACKING SERVO OFF  
SLED SERVO OFF  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
SELECT  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
SLED KICK LEVEL  
0 0 1 1  
0
0
0
0
(±1 × basic value) (default)  
Address 1  
Address 2  
Address 3  
Data 1  
Data 2  
3
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
KRAM DATA  
0
1
0
0
0
See "Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table"  
0 0 1 1  
($3400XX to $344FXX)  
—: don't care  
Command Preset Table ($348X to 34FX)  
Address 1 Address 2  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Address 3  
Command  
ter  
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC  
DOUT  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Booster Surf Brake  
Booster  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
DFCT  
Address 3  
Data 1  
Data 3  
Data 2  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS Bias Limit  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS Bias Data  
Traverse Center Data  
—: don't care  
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.  
Address 1  
Address 2  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20 D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
1
D4  
0
D3  
1
D0  
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS search, AGF  
TRK jump, AGT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FZC, AGC, SLD move  
DC measure, cancel  
Serial data read out  
FCS Bias, Gain,  
Surf jump / brake  
Gain  
1
0
1
0
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
FOCUS  
ASYO  
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
MIRR, DFCT, FOK  
TZC, COUT, Bottom,  
MIRR  
SLD filter  
Filter  
Clock, others  
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.  
Address 1  
Address 2  
Address 3  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
Regis-  
ter  
Command  
D23 to D20  
D19 D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9  
D8  
0
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D0  
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
System GAIN  
FOCUS  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX)  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
ter  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
4
5
Auto sequence  
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Blind (A, E),  
Brake (B),  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Overflow (C, G)  
Sled KICK,  
BRAKE (D),  
KICK (F)  
6
7
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Auto sequence (N)  
track jump count  
setting  
8
9
MODE setting  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Function  
specification  
—: dun't care  
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
ter  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
1
D0  
1
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Audio CTRL  
Signal select  
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Bass boost  
A
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Headphone  
Shock-proof  
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
memory setting  
Shock-proof  
memory control  
DOUT subcode-Q  
setting  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
DRAM I/F  
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Address  
Regis-  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
ter  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
1
D2  
D1  
1
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Compression  
setting  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
EFM playability  
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
enhancement setting  
Sync expansion  
specification  
A
1
0
1
0
Sleep setting  
Variable pitch  
setting  
Spindle servo  
setting  
Traverse monitor  
counter setting  
B
C
D
E
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
Spindle servo  
coefficient setting  
CLV CTRL  
SPD mode  
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
Regis-  
Command  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
ter  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
MODE  
8
1 0 0 0  
1 0 0 1  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
specification  
Function  
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
specification  
0 0  
0
AUDIO CTRL  
Signal select  
0 1 0 0  
0 0 1  
0 1  
0 1 0 1  
Bass boost  
1 0  
A
1 0 1 0  
1 1  
0
0 0 1  
0 1  
0 1 1 0  
Headphone  
1 0  
1 1  
0
Shock-proof  
0 1 1 1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
memory setting  
—: don't care  
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
Regis-  
Command  
Data 3  
0 0 0 0  
Data 4  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
ter  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
DOUT subcode-Q  
setting  
0
0
0
0
1 0 0 1  
1 1 1 0  
1 1 1 1  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DRAM I/F  
Compression  
setting  
A
1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 1  
EFM playability  
enhancement  
setting  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Sync expansion  
specification  
1 1 0 0  
1 1 1 1  
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Spindle servo  
setting  
Traverse monitor  
counter setting  
B
C
D
1 0 1 1  
1 1 0 0  
1 1 0 1  
Spindle servo  
coefficient setting  
CLV CTRL  
—: don't care  
CXD3048R  
(Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (1))  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
CONTENTS  
K00  
K01  
K02  
K03  
K04  
K05  
K06  
K07  
K08  
K09  
K0A  
K0B  
K0C  
K0D  
K0E  
K0F  
E0  
81  
23  
7F  
6A  
10  
14  
30  
7F  
46  
81  
1C  
7F  
58  
82  
7F  
SLED INPUT GAIN  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
SLED OUTPUT GAIN  
FOCUS INPUT GAIN  
SLED AUTO GAIN  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
K10  
K11  
K12  
K13  
K14  
K15  
K16  
K17  
K18  
K19  
K1A  
K1B  
K1C  
K1D  
K1E  
K1F  
4E  
32  
20  
30  
80  
77  
80  
77  
00  
F1  
7F  
3B  
81  
44  
7F  
5E  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN  
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN  
FOCUS AUTO GAIN  
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A  
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A  
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B  
Fix  
TRACKING INPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
K20  
K21  
K22  
K23  
K24  
K25  
K26  
K27  
K28  
K29  
K2A  
K2B  
K2C  
K2D  
K2E  
K2F  
82  
44  
18  
30  
7F  
46  
81  
3A  
7F  
66  
82  
44  
4E  
1B  
00  
00  
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN  
TRACKING AUTO GAIN  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
Not used  
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.  
– 41 –  
CXD3048R  
<Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (2)>  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
CONTENTS  
K30  
K31  
K32  
K33  
K34  
K35  
K36  
K37  
K38  
K39  
K3A  
K3B  
K3C  
K3D  
K3E  
K3F  
80  
66  
00  
7F  
6E  
20  
7F  
3B  
80  
44  
7F  
77  
86  
0D  
57  
00  
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)  
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B  
Not used  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L  
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
K40  
K41  
K42  
K43  
K44  
K45  
K46  
04  
7F  
7F  
79  
17  
6D  
00  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)  
Not used  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L  
K47  
K48  
K49  
K4A  
K4B  
K4C  
K4D  
K4E  
K4F  
00  
02  
7F  
7F  
79  
17  
54  
00  
00  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
Not used  
– 42 –  
CXD3048R  
§1-4. Description of SENS Signals  
SENS output  
Microcomputer  
serial register  
ASEQ = 0  
ASEQ = 1  
Output data length  
(latching not required)  
$0X  
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
FZC  
AS  
$1X  
$2X  
TZC  
$30 to $37  
$38  
SSTP  
AGOK  
XAVEBSY  
$38  
See §5-18. Description of Commands and Data  
Sets "$39".  
$39X  
Z
8 to 16 bits  
$3A  
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
FBIAS Count STOP  
$3B to $3F  
$4X  
SSTP  
XBUSY  
FOK  
0
$5X  
$6X  
$A0 to $A8  
$AA to $AF  
GFS  
GFS  
$BX  
COMP  
COUT  
OV64  
Z
COMP  
COUT  
OV64  
0
$CX  
$EX  
$7X, 8X, 9X, DX, FX  
$38 outputs AGOK during AGT and AGF command settings, and XAVEBSY during AVRG measurement.  
SSTP is output in all other cases.  
– 43 –  
CXD3048R  
Description of SENS Signals  
SENS output  
Z
The SENS pin is high impedance.  
XBUSY  
Low while the auto sequencer is in operation, high when operation terminates.  
Outputs the same signal as the FOK pin.  
High for "focus OK".  
FOK  
GFS  
High when the regenerated frame sync is obtained with the correct timing.  
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.  
COMP  
High when Reg.B is latched, low when COUT is counted for the initial Reg.B number.  
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.  
High when Reg.B is latched, toggles each time COUT is counted for the Reg.B number.  
While $44 and $45 are being executed, toggles with each COUT 8-count instead of the  
Reg.B number.  
COUT  
OV64  
Low when the EFM signal is lengthened by 64 channel clock pulses or more after passing  
through the sync detection filter.  
– 44 –  
CXD3048R  
§1-5. Description of Commands  
The meaning of the data for each address on the XLAT pin side is explained below.  
$4X commands  
Register name  
4
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
MAX timer value  
MT2 MT1  
Timer range  
AS3  
AS2  
AS1  
AS0  
MT3  
MT0 LSSL  
0
0
0
Command  
AS3  
AS2  
0
AS1  
0
AS0  
0
Cancel  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Fine Search  
Focus-On  
1
0
RXF  
1
1
1
1 Track Jump  
10 Track Jump  
2N Track Jump  
M Track Move  
0
0
RXF  
RXF  
RXF  
RXF  
0
1
1
0
1
1
RXF = 0 Forward  
RXF = 1 Reverse  
When the Focus-on command ($47) is canceled, $02 is sent and the auto sequence is interrupted.  
When the Track jump commands ($44, $45 and $48 to $4D) are canceled, $25 is sent and the auto sequence  
is interrupted.  
MAX timer value  
Timer range  
MT3  
23.2ms  
1.49s  
MT2  
11.6ms  
0.74s  
MT1  
5.8ms  
0.37s  
MT0  
2.9ms  
0.18s  
LSSL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
To disable the MAX timer, set the MAX timer value to "0".  
$5X commands  
Timer  
Blind (A, E), Overflow (C, G)  
Brake (B)  
TR3  
TR2  
TR1  
TR0  
0.18ms  
0.36ms  
0.09ms  
0.18ms  
0.045ms  
0.09ms  
0.022ms  
0.045ms  
– 45 –  
CXD3048R  
$6X commands  
Register name  
Data 1  
Data 2  
KICK (D)  
KICK (F)  
6
SD3  
Timer  
SD2  
SD1  
SD0  
KF3  
KF2  
KF1  
KF0  
SD3  
SD2  
SD1  
5.8ms  
2.9ms  
SD0  
When executing KICK (D) $44 or $45  
When executing KICK (D) $4C or $4D  
23.2ms  
11.6ms  
11.6ms  
5.8ms  
2.9ms  
1.45ms  
Timer  
KF3  
KF2  
KF1  
KF0  
0.72ms  
0.36ms  
0.18ms  
0.09ms  
KICK (F)  
$7X commands  
Auto sequence track jump count setting  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20  
Auto sequence track  
jump count setting  
This command is used to set N when a 2N-track jump is executed, to set M when an M-track move is  
executed and to set the jump count when fine search is executed for auto sequencer.  
The maximum track count is 65,535, but note that with a 2N-track jump the maximum track jump count  
depends on the mechanical limitations of the optical system.  
When the track jump count is from 0 to 15, the COUT signal is counted for 2N-track jumps and M-track  
moves; when the count is 16 or over, the MIRR signal is counted. For fine search, the COUT signal is  
counted.  
– 46 –  
CXD3048R  
$8X commands  
Data 1  
D2 D1  
CD- DOUT DOUT  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Command  
MODE  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
VCO  
SEL2  
VCO  
SEL1  
WSEL  
ASHS SOCT0  
specification ROM Mute Mute-F  
Command bit C2PO timing  
Processing  
CDROM mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are not  
performed.  
CDROM = 1  
CDROM = 0  
1-3  
1-3  
Audio mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are performed.  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT Mute = 1 When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DOUT output is muted.  
DOUT Mute = 0 When Digital Out is on, DOUT output is not muted.  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT Mute F = 1 When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DA output is muted.  
DOUT Mute F = 0 DA output mute is not affected when Digital Out is either on or off.  
MD2 Other mute conditions  
DOUT Mute DOUT Mute F DOUT output  
DA output for 48-bit slot  
0dB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
OFF  
dB  
0dB  
dB  
0dB  
0dB  
dB  
dB  
See "Mute conditions" (1) to (5) under $AX commands for other mute conditions.  
When $A4 DTSL1 = 1, the Digital Out from the bass boost or shock-proof is selected. See the description  
of Digital Out.  
– 47 –  
CXD3048R  
Command bit  
WSEL = 1  
WSEL = 0  
Sync protection window width  
±26 channel clock  
Application  
Anti-rolling is enhanced.  
±6 channel clock  
Sync window protection is enhanced.  
In normal-speed playback, channel clock = 4.3218MHz.  
Command bit  
Function  
ASHS = 0  
ASHS = 1  
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to normal speed.  
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to half speed.  
See "§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed" for settings.  
Command bit  
Processing  
Subcode-Q is output from the SQSO pin.  
SOCT0  
0
SOCT1  
0
The spindle speed measurement result is output from the SQSO pin. Input the  
readout clock to SQCK. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Various signals are output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.  
(See Timing Chart 2-4.)  
The error rate is output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.  
(See Timing Chart 2-6.)  
$8X command TXOUT = 0 and $A8X command SDTO OUT = 0 must be set.  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
Command  
D0  
D3  
D0  
D3  
MODE  
specification  
VCO  
SEL2  
VCO  
SEL1  
ASHS SOCT0  
KSL3 KSL2 KSL1 KSL0  
See above.  
Command bit  
VCOSEL2 = 0  
VCOSEL2 = 1  
Processing  
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to normal speed.  
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.  
Command bit  
Processing  
KSL3  
KSL2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/1 frequency-divided.  
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/2 frequency-divided.  
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/4 frequency-divided.  
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/8 frequency-divided.  
– 48 –  
CXD3048R  
Command bit  
VCOSEL1 = 0  
VCOSEL1 = 1  
Processing  
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to normal speed.  
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.  
Command bit  
Processing  
KSL1  
KSL0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/1 frequency-divided.  
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/2 frequency-divided.  
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/4 frequency-divided.  
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/8 frequency-divided.  
Block Diagram of VCO Internal Path  
VCO1SEL  
1/1  
1/2  
No.1 VCO1  
No.2 VCO1  
To DSP interior  
1/4  
1/8  
VCO1CS0  
KSL3, 2  
VCO1 internal path  
1/1  
1/2  
VCO2SEL  
VCO2  
To DSP interior  
1/4  
1/8  
KSL1, 0  
VCO2 internal path  
– 49 –  
CXD3048R  
$8X commands cont.  
Data 4  
Data 5  
D2 D1  
Data 6  
D2 D1  
Command  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
MODE  
0
VCO1  
CS0  
SCOR  
SEL  
ERC4  
SCSY SOCT1 TXON TXOUT OUTL1 OUTL0  
See page 48.  
specification  
Command bit  
VCO1CS0 = 0  
VCO1CS0 = 1  
Processing  
Selects the No. 1 VCO1.  
Selects the No. 2 VCO1.  
The CXD3048R has two multiplier PLL VCO1s, and this command selects one of these VCO1s.  
The two VCOs are No. 2 and No. 1 in order of the maximum frequency.  
The block diagrams for VCO1 and VCO2 including VCOSEL1, VCOSEL2, KSL0 to KSL3 and VCO1CS0  
shown on the previous page.  
Command bit  
ERC4 = 0  
Processing  
C2 error double correction is performed when DSPB = 1.  
C2 error quadruple correction is performed even when DSPB = 1.  
ERC4 = 1  
Command bit  
SCOR SEL = 0  
SCOR SEL = 1  
Processing  
WDCK signal is output.  
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) is output.  
Used when outputting GRSCOR from the WDCK pin.  
Command bit  
Processing  
SCSY = 0  
SCSY = 1  
No processing.  
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) synchronization is applied again.  
Used to resynchronize GRSCOR.  
The rising edge signal of this command bit is used internally, so when resynchronizing GRSCOR, first return  
the setting to "0" and then set to "1".  
GRSCOR is the crystal accuracy SCOR signal obtained by removing the motor wow component.  
This signal is synchronized with PCMDATA.  
The resynchronization conditions are when GTOP = high.  
Command bit  
TXON = 0  
Processing  
When CD TEXT data is not demodulated, set TXON to "0".  
When CD TEXT data is demodulated, set TXON to "1".  
TXON = 1  
See "§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".  
– 50 –  
CXD3048R  
Command bit  
TXOUT = 0  
TXOUT = 1  
Processing  
Various signals except for CD TEXT are output from the SQSO pin.  
CD TEXT data is output from the SQSO pin.  
See "§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".  
Command bit  
Processing  
OUTL1 = 0  
OUTL1 = 1  
WDCK and XPCK are output.  
WDCK and XPCK outputs are set low.  
Command bit  
OUTL0 = 0  
OUTL0 = 1  
Processing  
PCMD, BCK and LRCK are output.  
PCMD, BCK and LRCK outputs are set low.  
Data 7  
Command  
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
D0  
0
MODE  
specification  
OUTL2  
Command bit  
OUTL2 = 0  
OUTL2 = 1  
Processing  
WFCK is output.  
WFCK is set low.  
The $A7X command XOE OUT must be set to "0".  
– 51 –  
CXD3048R  
$9X commands  
Data 1  
D2 D1  
Data 2  
Command  
D3  
1
D0  
1
D3  
BiliGL BiliGL  
MAIN SUB  
D2  
D1  
D0  
0
Function  
specification  
DSPB ASEQ  
ON-OFFON-OFF  
FLFC  
Command bit  
DSPB = 0  
Processing  
Normal-speed playback, C2 error quadruple correction.  
Double-speed playback, C2 error double correction. (quadruple correction when ERC4 = 1)  
DSPB = 1  
Normally FLFC = 0.  
In CAV-W mode, set FLFC to "1" independently of the playback speed.  
Command bit  
BiliGL SUB = 0  
BiliGL SUB = 1  
BiliGL MAIN = 0  
STEREO  
SUB  
BiliGL MAIN = 1  
MAIN  
Mute  
Definition of bilingual capable MAIN, SUB and STEREO  
The left channel input is output to the left and right channels for MAIN.  
The right channel input is output to the left and right channels for SUB.  
The left and right channel inputs are output to the left and right channels, respectively, for STEREO.  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Command  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
1
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
1
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Function  
specification  
0
0
0
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
D3  
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
DIV4  
This switches the digital PLL master clock.  
Either the conventional mode or the 2/3 mode (2/3 of the conventional clock) can be selected.  
Command bit  
DIV4 = 0  
Processing  
Digital PLL master clock; conventional mode. (preset)  
Digital PLL master clock; 2/3 mode.  
DIV4 = 1  
Note) Do not set DIV4 to "1" when DSPB = 0.  
– 52 –  
CXD3048R  
$AX commands  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Command  
D3  
0
D2  
D1  
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
Audio CTRL  
0
Mute  
ATT PCT1 PCT2  
SOC2  
Command bit  
Mute = 0  
Meaning  
Command bit  
ATT = 0  
Meaning  
Attenuation off.  
–12dB  
Mute off if other mute  
conditions are not set.  
ATT = 1  
Mute on. Peak register  
reset.  
Mute = 1  
Mute conditions  
(1) When register A mute = 1.  
(2) When register 8 DOUT Mute F = 1 and Digital Out is on ($B command MD2 = 1).  
(3) When GFS stays low for over 35ms (during normal-speed).  
(4) When register 9 BiliGL MAIN = Sub = 1.  
(5) When register A PCT1 = 1 and PCT2 = 0.  
(1) to (3) perform zero-cross muting with a 1ms time limit.  
Command bit  
ECC error correction ability  
Meaning  
Normal mode  
PCM Gain  
PCT1  
PCT2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
× 0dB  
× 0dB  
Mute  
C1: double; C2: quadruple  
C1: double; C2: quadruple  
C1: double; C2: double  
C1: double; C2: double  
Level meter mode  
Peak meter mode  
Normal mode  
× 0dB  
Description of level meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-4.)  
When the LSI is set to this mode, it performs digital level meter functions.  
When the 96-bit clock is input to SQCK, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO.  
The initial 80 bits are subcode-Q data (see "[2] Subcode Interface"). The last 16 bits are LSB first, which are  
15-bit PCM data (absolute values) and an L/R flag.  
The final bit (L/R flag) is high when the 15-bit PCM data is from the left channel and low when the data is  
from the right channel.  
The PCM data is reset and the L/R flag is inverted after one readout.  
Then the measurement for the maximum value continues until the next readout.  
– 53 –  
CXD3048R  
Description of peak meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-5.)  
When the LSI is set to this mode, the maximum PCM data value is detected regardless of if it comes from  
the left or right channel.  
The 96-bit clock must be input to SQCK to read out this data.  
When the 96-bit clock is input, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO and the value is set in the LSI internal  
register again.  
In other words, the PCM maximum value register is not reset by the readout.  
To reset the PCM maximum value register to "0", set PCT1 = PCT2 = 0 or set the $AX command Mute.  
The subcode-Q absolute time is automatically controlled in this mode.  
In other words, after the maximum value is generated, the absolute time for CRC to become OK is retained in  
the memory. Normal operation is conducted for the relative time.  
The final bit (L/R flag) of the 96-bit data is normally "0".  
The pre-value hold and average value interpolation data are fixed to level (– ) for this mode.  
Command bit  
SOC2 = 0  
Processing  
The SENS signal is output from the SENS pin as usual.  
The SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.  
SOC2 = 1  
SENS output switching  
This command is used to output the SQSO pin signal from the SENS pin.  
When SOC2 = 0, SENS output is performed as usual.  
When SOC2 = 1, the SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.  
At this time, the readout clock is input to the SCLK pin.  
Note) Perform the SOC2 switching when SQCK = SCLK = high.  
Data 6  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Audio CTRL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
– 54 –  
CXD3048R  
$A4 commands (preset: $A4C800)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
DTSLDTSLMCSL MCSL  
A4  
SDSL SDSL SDSL  
0
0
1
0
0
RSL1RSL0  
0
0
(Signal select)  
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Data 5  
Data 6  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
max  
max  
max  
max  
EN CKOUT CKOUT SLD max  
max  
max  
max  
C2PO3 C2PO2 C2PO1 C2PO0  
XSOE SL2 SL1 BBIN C2PO7 C2PO6 C2PO5 C2PO4  
RSL1, RSL0:  
These bits set the external buffer RAM.  
RSL1  
RSL0  
Processing  
The external buffer RAM is set to 4M bits.  
No selected.  
0
1
1
0
0
1
The external buffer RAM is set to 16M bits.  
: preset  
DTSL1, DTSL0: See the second half of the description of $A4 commands.  
MCSL1:  
This bit sets the DAC block master clock.  
When "0", the DAC block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs). (default)  
When "1", the DAC block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).  
This bit sets the shock-proof memory controller block master clock.  
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs).  
(default)  
MCSL0:  
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).  
This bit switches the command input method.  
ENXSOE:  
When "0", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input  
from the respective pins. (default)  
When "1", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input  
from the CLOK pin.  
The clock input is switched with the XSOE pin. At this time, connect the SCLK pin to high.  
ENXSOE XSOE pin  
CLOK pin  
SCLK pin  
SENS serial data readout  
clock input  
0
0
L
Command transfer clock input  
SENS serial data readout  
clock input  
H
Command transfer clock input  
SENS serial data readout  
clock input  
1
1
L
Connect to high.  
H
Command transfer clock input Connect to high.  
In addition, when ENXSOE is set to "1" and the SQSO pin signal output is read from the  
SENS pin, the command input method is as follows.  
At this time, connect the SCLK and SQCK pins to high.  
See the command descriptions for $A command SOC2 and $8 commands TXOUT, SOCT0  
and SOCT1.  
– 55 –  
CXD3048R  
$A8 $8  
SDTO TX SOC SOC  
OUT OUT T0  
$8  
$8  
ENXS XSOE $A  
CLOK pin  
SENS pin  
OE  
pin SOC2  
T1  
Command transfer  
clock input  
1
H
High or low output  
SENS serial data  
readout clock input  
1
1
L
L
0
1
SENS output  
Subcode-Q readout  
clock input  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Subcode-Q output  
Readout clock input of Spindle speed  
the spindle speed  
measurement result  
1
L
1
measurement  
result output  
2
Various signal readout Various signal  
1
1
1
L
L
L
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
3
clock input  
output  
Error rate readout  
clock input  
4
Error rate output  
CD TEXT data  
readout clock input  
CD TEXT data  
output  
Readout clock input of Shock-proof  
1
L
1
1
shock-proof memory  
controller serial data  
memory controller  
serial data output  
: don't care  
1
2
3
See "§1-4. Description of SENS Signals" for the SENS output.  
See Timing Chart 2-5 for the spindle speed measurement result.  
The output signals are PER7 to PER0, FOK, GFS, LOCK, EMPH, ALOCK and VF9 to  
VF0. For details, see Timing Chart 2-4.  
4
For the error rate timing, see Timing Chart 2-6.  
CKOUTSL2, CKOUTSL1:  
These bits select the clock output from the R4M pin.  
When the crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL = high, the output frequency is halved.  
CKOUTSL2 CKOUTSL1  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4.2336MHz output  
8.4672MHz (R8M) output  
4.2336MHz (C4M) output  
Changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.  
: preset  
DTSL1, DTSL0: These bits select the data output from the DOUT pin.  
In external mode, the data input through the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is used.  
DOUT output in the following tables is valid when $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT  
EN2 are both 1. In this case, see "$34A commands".  
When $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT EN2 are both 0, see "§4-5-2. Digital Out  
from DA Interface Input".  
At this time, the data from the CD DSP is output from the DOUT pin with a subcode is added.  
– 56 –  
CXD3048R  
SDSL2, SDSL1: These bits select the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD pin.  
SLDBBIN:  
This bit selects the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD and  
DOUT pins.  
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0:  
These bits set the C2PO conditions.  
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0  
00000000 to 11111111  
Ptocessing  
The C2PO upper limit value reflected to mon C2PO and  
added to the write prohibited condition.  
When SLDBBIN = 0, the internally connected data is selected. (default)  
DTSL1 DTSL0 SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0 Input to DAC block DOUT output  
PCMD output  
DSP mode  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode  
DSP & DAC mode  
1
DSP & DAC mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof  
memory controller memory controller  
mode  
Shock-proof  
Shock-proof memory  
controller & DAC mode  
1
& DAC mode  
DSP mode  
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode  
DSP mode  
1
DSP & DAC mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof  
memory controller memory controller  
mode  
Shock-proof  
Shock-proof memory  
controller & DAC mode  
1
mode  
DSP mode  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode  
1
DSP & DAC mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
DSP mode  
Shock-proof  
memory controller  
mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller & DAC mode  
1
DSP mode  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
DSP mode  
1
DSP & DAC mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
External mode  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Shock-proof  
memory controller  
mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller & DAC mode  
1
: preset  
1: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.  
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency  
changes when SDSL0 is switched.  
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and  
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set  
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.  
– 57 –  
CXD3048R  
When SLDBBIN = 1, the data input from the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is selected.  
DTSL1 DTSL0 SDSL2 SDSL1 SDSL0 Input to DAC block  
DOUT output  
PCMD output  
DSP mode  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode  
External & DAC  
mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
0
0
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode  
DSP mode  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
DSP mode  
1
External & DAC mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
Shock-proof  
memory controller  
mode  
0
1
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode  
DSP mode  
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
External mode  
0
1
External & DAC mode  
DSP mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
1
0
1
0
0
1
External & DAC mode  
DSP mode  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode  
External mode  
Shock-proof memory  
controller mode  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
External & DAC mode  
1: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.  
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency  
changes when SDSL0 is switched.  
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and  
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set  
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.  
– 58 –  
CXD3048R  
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A504000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A5  
ZMUT  
A
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
SMUT AD10 AD9 AD8  
(Bass boost)  
Data 5  
Data 6  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 setup  
0
0
0
ZMUTA:  
This bit sets the zero detection analog mute on/off.  
When "0", zero detection analog mute is on. (default)  
When "1", zero detection analog mute is off.  
When zero data is detected for both the left and right channels, the LPF block output is set  
to center output.  
SMUT:  
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.  
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)  
When "1", soft mute is on.  
AD10 to AD0:  
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as  
follows.  
Attenuation data  
7FF (h)  
Audio output  
+6.02dB  
7FE (h)  
:
+6.016dB  
:
402 (h)  
401 (h)  
+0.017dB  
+0.0085dB  
400 (h)  
0dB  
3FF (h)  
3FE (h)  
:
–0.0085dB  
–0.017dB  
:
001 (h)  
–60.206dB  
000 (h)  
∞  
: preset  
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:  
Attenuation data  
Audio data output = 20 log  
[dB]  
1024  
setup:  
This bit can shorten the rise time of the VREFL and VREFR pins.  
When "0", the rise time is not shortened. (default) (Recommendation setting when the  
external capacitance is 1µF or less.)  
When "1", the rise time is shortened. (Recommendation setting when the external  
capacitance exceeds 1µF.)  
Return setup to 0 after the VREFL and VREFR pins rise. (setup = 0 for normal use)  
– 59 –  
CXD3048R  
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A540A4)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A5  
PDM OBIT OBIT  
1
DAC HiCut BST  
EMPH FILTER CL  
0
1
0
1
0
1
PWDN ZDPL WOC  
(Bass boost)  
SEL  
1
0
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
0
1
0
0
PWDN:  
ZDPL:  
This bit sets the DAC block operation mode.  
When "0", the DAC block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power  
consumption. (default)  
The zero detection flag for the headphone volume circuit side is output from the LRMU pin.  
When "1", the DAC block operates normally.  
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity.  
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)  
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.  
When WOC = 1, the DAC sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.  
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.  
WOC:  
DAC EMPH:  
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)  
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.  
HiCutFILTER:  
BSTCL:  
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.  
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)  
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.  
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.  
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.  
0: Off; normal operation (default)  
PDMSEL:  
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the DAC block.  
When "0", connect the external resistors and capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins. (default)  
When "1", connect the external capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins.  
100  
100Ω  
AOUT1 (2)  
Analog out  
AOUT1 (2)  
VREFL (R)  
Analog out  
2200pF  
2200pF  
22kΩ  
22kΩ  
VREFL (R)  
1µF  
1µF  
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 1)  
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 0)  
OBIT1, OBIT0: These bits set the word length of the serial data output from the PCMD pin.  
The serial data word length can be selected only when the data output from the PCMD pin  
is set to DAC output.  
OBIT1  
OBIT0  
Serial data word length  
0
0
1
0
1
0
20 bits  
18 bits  
16 bits  
: preset  
– 60 –  
CXD3048R  
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A58000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
BBONBBONHBONHBON BBSL BBSL  
A5  
HBSL HBSL BBST BBST  
0
1
0
1
1
0
(Bass boost)  
1
0
Vdwn1 Vdwn0  
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
BBST BBST BBST BBST  
Vup1 Vup0 Uth Lth  
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.  
BBON1  
BBON0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bass boost is off.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.  
: preset  
HBON1, HBON0:These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.  
HBON1  
HBON0  
Processing  
High boost is off.  
0
1
1
0
0
1
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.  
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.  
: preset  
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.  
BBSL1  
BBSL0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.  
: preset  
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.  
HBSL1  
HBSL0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.  
: preset  
– 61 –  
CXD3048R  
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0: These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.  
Processing  
BBST Vdwn1 BBST Vdwn0  
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.  
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.  
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.  
: preset  
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0: These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.  
BBST Vup1 BBST Vup0  
Processing  
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.  
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.  
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.  
: preset  
BBST Uth:  
BBST Lth:  
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.  
When "0", Uth is set to –1.9dB. (default)  
When "1", Uth is set to –0.9dB.  
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.  
When "0", Lth is set to –12dB. (default)  
When "1", Lth is set to –4.4dB.  
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced  
is the attack time.  
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the  
boost level is increased is the release time.  
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A5C000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A5  
COMP  
ON  
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
(Bass boost)  
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
PDM  
0
0
0
INV  
COMP ON:  
PDM INV:  
This bit sets the compressor on/off.  
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)  
When "1", the compressor is on.  
This bit sets the DAC block PDM signal polarity.  
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)  
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.  
– 62 –  
CXD3048R  
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A604000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4  
SMUT AD10 AD9 AD8  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A6  
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
(Headphone)  
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0  
SMUT:  
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.  
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)  
When "1", soft mute is on.  
AD10 to AD0:  
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as  
follows.  
Attenuation data  
7FF (h)  
Audio output  
+6.02dB  
7FE (h)  
:
+6.016dB  
:
402 (h)  
401 (h)  
+0.017dB  
+0.0085dB  
400 (h)  
0dB  
3FF (h)  
3FE (h)  
:
–0.0085dB  
–0.017dB  
:
001 (h)  
–60.206dB  
000 (h)  
∞  
: preset  
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:  
Attenuation data  
Audio data output = 20 log  
[dB]  
1024  
– 63 –  
CXD3048R  
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A640A4)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
PDM  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A6  
DAC HiCut BST  
EMPH FILTER CL  
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
PWDN ZDPL WOC  
(Headphone)  
SEL  
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
0
1
0
0
PWDN:  
ZDPL:  
This bit sets the headphone block operation mode.  
When "0", the headphone block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power  
consumption. (default)  
When "1", the headphone block operates normally.  
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity. The zero detection flag for the headphone  
volume circuit is output from the LRMU pin when $A6 PWDN = 0.  
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)  
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.  
When WOC = 1, the headphone sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.  
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.  
WOC:  
DAC EMPH:  
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)  
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.  
HiCutFILTER:  
BSTCL:  
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.  
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)  
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.  
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.  
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.  
0: Off; normal operation (default)  
PDMSEL  
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the headphone block.  
1 output  
0 output  
1 output  
0 output  
PDMSEL = 0  
PDMSEL = 1  
Left channel side waveform (Right channel side waveform is inverted.)  
– 64 –  
CXD3048R  
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A68000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
BBONBBONHBONHBON BBSL BBSL  
A6  
HBSL HBSL BBST BBST  
0
1
1
0
1
0
(Headphone)  
1
0
Vdwn1 Vdwn0  
1
0
1
0
1
0
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
BBST BBST BBST BBST  
Vup1 Vup0 Uth Lth  
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.  
BBON1  
BBON0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bass boost is off.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.  
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.  
: preset  
HBON1, HBON0:These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.  
HBON1  
HBON0  
Processing  
High boost is off.  
0
1
1
0
0
1
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.  
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.  
: preset  
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.  
BBSL1  
BBSL0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.  
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.  
: preset  
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.  
HBSL1  
HBSL0  
Processing  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.  
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.  
: preset  
– 65 –  
CXD3048R  
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0:  
These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.  
BBST Vdwn1 BBST Vdwn0  
Processing  
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.  
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.  
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.  
: preset  
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0:  
These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.  
BBST Vup1 BBST Vup0  
Processing  
0
0
1
0
1
1
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.  
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.  
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.  
: preset  
BBST Uth:  
BBST Lth:  
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.  
When "0", Uth is set to –1.9dB. (default)  
When "1", Uth is set to –0.9dB.  
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.  
When "0", Lth is set to –12dB. (default)  
When "1", Lth is set to –4.4dB.  
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced  
is the attack time.  
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the  
boost level is increased is the release time.  
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A6C000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A6  
COMP  
ON  
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
(Headphone)  
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
PDM  
0
0
0
INV  
COMP ON:  
PDM INV:  
This bit sets the compressor on/off.  
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)  
When "1", the compressor is on.  
This bit sets the headphone block PDM signal polarity.  
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)  
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.  
– 66 –  
CXD3048R  
$A7 commands (preset: $A7200000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
(ShockA-p7roof  
XOE  
SL GTOP NOLIM SPSLREAD REF REF  
SL  
MSL2 MSL1 MSL0  
OUT  
SEL ON  
0
1
1
1
memory setting)  
XQOK XWRE CHECK WDCK COM  
2
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
STA XWI XWI SPSLWQR A11 READREAD MON  
SEL H2 H1 COM MON SEL S2  
S1 SEL  
ADDRST ADR  
0
SEL  
MO  
SL XQOK:  
SL XWRE:  
This bit sets the XQOK control mode.  
When "0", XQOK should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until  
GRSCOR goes high. (default)  
When "1", XQOK should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.  
This bit sets the XWRE control mode.  
When "0", XWRE should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until  
GRSCOR goes high. (default)  
When "1", XWRE should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.  
GTOP CHECK:This bit controls GRSCOR generation when GTOP is high.  
When "0", the GRSCOR generation circuit is not resynchronized even when GTOP is high.  
When "1", the GRSCOR generation circuit is resynchronized when GTOP goes high. (default)  
NOLIM WDCK: Always set to "1".  
SPSL COM:  
This bit sets whether to control XQOK, XWRE and XRDE with pins or serial data.  
When "0", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with pins. (default)  
When "1", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with serial data ($A8).  
Note) The Data 3 D3 and Data 6 D1 bits should be switched somultaneously.  
READ2,  
READS2, READS1:  
This bit sets the audio data readout speed from the shock-proof memory controller block.  
READ2 READS2 READS1 Readout speed setting  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1× speed readout  
0.5× speed readout  
0.25× speed readout  
2× speed readout  
: preset  
The shock-proof memory controller interior should be resynchronized after the readout speed  
is switched. Execute the $AAX ADPWO command for resynchronization.  
– 67 –  
CXD3048R  
REF SEL:  
This bit sets the DRAM refresh rate. (Use this bit in conjunction with the $AC command  
REFSEL2.)  
REFSEL2 REFSEL  
Reflesh rate  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
11.51ms/2048 times  
5.81ms/2048 times  
46.44ms/2048 times  
23.22ms/2048 times  
: preset  
REF ON:  
This bit sets the DRAM refresh function on/off.  
When "0", the refresh function is off. (default)  
When "1", the refresh function is on.  
XOE OUT:  
This bit switches the WFCK pin output mode.  
When "0", WFCK is output from the WFCK pin. (default)  
When "1", XOE is output from the WFCK pin.  
MSL2 to MSL0: These bits set the DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer.  
MSL2  
MSL1  
MSL0 DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
The entire DRAM area can be used as audio data.  
32K bits  
64K bits  
128K bits  
256K bits  
512K bits  
1M bits  
2M bits  
: preset  
ADDRST SEL: This bit selects the address reset mode.  
When "0", the conventional address reset is used. (default)  
When "1", the address is reset by the ADDRST command.  
This bit selects the remaining valid addresses.  
ADRMO:  
XWIH2:  
When "0", the conventional remaining valid addresses are displayed. (default)  
When "1", the remaining addresses from 0000000 to 1111111 are displayed.  
The XWIH condition addition is selected.  
When "0", the condition is added. (default)  
When "1", the write speed condition is added to the write prohibited condition.  
The XWIH condition addition is selected.  
XWIH1:  
When "0", the condition is not added. (default)  
When "1", the condition of failure access to DRAM is added to the write prohibited condition.  
This bit selects the XWRE, XQOK and XRDE outputs.  
When "0", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is prohibited. (default)  
When "1", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is allowed.  
WQR MON:  
– 68 –  
CXD3048R  
A11 SEL:  
STA SEL:  
This bit selects the A11 pin function.  
When "0", the A11 pin is used as the A11 pin. (default)  
When "1", the A11 pin is used as a low-active write prohibit factor.  
This bit selects the shock-proof memory controller status output.  
When "1", the conventional ESP status is output. (See §4-13-3.)  
When "0", the new shock-proof memory controller status is output. (default)  
The status readout when STA SEL = 0 is as follows.  
Signal  
D0 XWPHD  
Description  
0: Write prohibited  
1: Address updated  
0: No valid data  
D1 QRCVD  
D2 XEMP  
D3 monGRSCOR 1: GRSCOR present  
D4 monC2PO  
D5 GTOP  
1: C2PO of the setting value or higher present  
1: GTOP present in the preceding GRSCOR  
Don't care.  
D6  
D7 AM13  
D8 AM14  
D9 AM15  
D10 AM16  
D11 AM17  
D12 AM18  
D13 AM19  
D14 AM20  
D15 AM21  
D16  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Address monitor  
Don't care.  
D17  
Don't care.  
D18 monADPCM  
D19 XFUL  
1: ADPCM compression error  
0: No write area  
D20 ROF  
1: The DSP SRAM has overflowed.  
1: The speed limit is exceeded for more than the set number  
during one GRSCOR.  
D21 SPOVER  
D22 NOWR  
1: Access is failed in the shock-proof memory controller.  
Don't care.  
D23  
MONSEL:  
This bit selects the COUT, XUGF, MIRR and XPCK pin functions.  
When "0", these pins output the signals corresponding to the SRO1, MTSL1 and MTSL0  
commands. (See the table on page 8.)  
When "1", these pins output SCOR, QRCVD and GTOP, respectively.  
– 69 –  
CXD3048R  
$A8 commands (preset: $A8F8)  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A8  
XSOEO ADDR  
SDTO  
OUT  
(Shock-proof  
memory control)  
1
0
0
0
XQOKXWRE XRDE XSOEO  
0
2
ST  
XQOK, XWRE, XRDE:  
When $A7 command SPSL COM = 1, XQOK, XWRE and XRDE are controlled with serial  
data. (default: 1)  
XSOEO:  
This bit controls the serial data from the shock-proof block.  
Shock-proof block data is loaded to the serial readout register by detecting the falling edge  
of XSOEO.  
XSOEO2:  
ADDRST:  
SDTO OUT:  
This bit is used when the microcomputer reads data from the DRAM. (default: 1)  
The shock-proof memory controller block loads the data from the DRAM to the serial  
readout register by detecting the fall of XSOEO2.  
This command is valid when $A7 command ADDRST SEL = 1.  
When "0", no operations are performed. (default)  
When "1", the VWA, WA and RA are all reset.  
This bit is used to output serial data from the shock-proof block to the SQSO pin.  
When "0", various signals are output from the SQSO pin. For details on these signals, see  
$8X commands SOCT1, SOCT0 and TXOUT. (default)  
When "1", the shock-proof block serial data is output from the SQSO pin.  
– 70 –  
CXD3048R  
$A9 commands (preset: $A90000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A9  
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ  
1
0
0
1
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ  
A3 A2 A1 A0  
0
0
0
0
(DOUT subcode-Q  
setting)  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
SubQ SubQ SubQ SubQ  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
SubQA3 to SubQA0, SubQD7 to SubQD0:  
These bits set the Ubit inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block. Note that these  
bits have no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the CD DSP block.  
SubQA3 SubQA2 SubQA1 SubAD0 SubQD7 SubQD6 SubQD5 SubQD4 SubQD3 SubQD2 SubQD1 SubQD0  
Setting contents  
Control, address  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Q1  
Q9  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q8  
Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Movement number  
Q17 Q18 Q19 Q20 Q21 Q22 Q23 Q24 INDEX number  
Elapsed time within a  
movement (minutes)  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Q25 Q26 Q27 Q28 Q29 Q30 Q31 Q32  
Q33 Q34 Q35 Q36 Q37 Q38 Q39 Q40  
Q41 Q42 Q43 Q44 Q45 Q46 Q47 Q48  
Elapsed time within a  
movement (seconds)  
Elapsed time within a  
movement (frames)  
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Q49 Q50 Q51 Q52 Q53 Q54 Q55 Q56 (Set to "0".)  
Q57 Q58 Q59 Q60 Q61 Q62 Q63 Q64 Absolute time (minutes)  
Q65 Q66 Q67 Q68 Q69 Q70 Q71 Q72 Absolute time (seconds)  
Q73 Q74 Q75 Q76 Q77 Q78 Q79 Q80 Absolute time (frames)  
DON DCL DUP1 DUP0 DLD  
0
0
0
(Control command)  
DON: This bit sets the Ubit output on/off inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block.  
When "0", Ubit is not output. (default)  
When "1", Ubit is output.  
DCL: This bit clears the elapsed time within a movement to "0".  
The elapsed time is cleared to "0" at the falling edge of DCL (DCL = 1 0). (default: DCL = 1)  
DUP1: This bit sets the absolute time counter operate/stop.  
When "0", the absolute time counter is stopped. (default)  
When "1", the absolute time counter operates.  
DUP0: This bit sets the elapsed time within a movement counter operate/stop.  
When "0", the elapsed time within a movement counter is stopped. (default)  
When "1", the elapsed time within a movement counter operates.  
DLD: This bit is used when setting the INDEX number, elapsed time within a movement, and absolute  
time.  
When "0", the settings cannot be changed. (default)  
When "1", the settings can be changed. Note that "0" is output for the INDEX number, elapsed  
time within a movement, and absolute time while DLD = 1.  
The control, address and movement number settings can be changed regardless of the DLD setting.  
– 71 –  
CXD3048R  
$A9E commands (preset: $A9E00000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A9E  
(DRAM I/F)  
DRD15 DRD14 DRD13 DRD12  
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
DRWR DRADR  
0
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
DRD11 DRD10 DRD9 DRD8 DRD7 DRD6 DRD5 DRD4 DRD3 DRD2 DRD1 DRD0  
DRWR:  
This bit sets write/read for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.  
When "0", the read from DRAM mode is set. (default)  
When "1", the write to DRAM mode is set.  
DRADR:  
This bit sets the address control method for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.  
When "0", relative address control is set. (default)  
When "1", absolute address control is set.  
DRD15 to DRD0: These bits set the data to be written to the DRAM for access from the microcomputer to  
the DRAM.  
$A9F commands (preset: $A9F00000)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
DADR DADR DADR DADR  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
A9F  
(DRAM I/F)  
DADR DADR DADR DADR  
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
15  
14  
13  
12  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR DADR  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DADR19 to DADR0:  
These bits set the DRAM address for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.  
– 72 –  
CXD3048R  
$AA commands (preset: $AA00004)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AA  
GR  
SEL  
ADP BIT BIT  
ON SL1 SL0  
ADP  
WO  
(Compression  
setting)  
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Data 5  
Data 6  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
ADPCM ADPCM  
0
0
0
ORMU  
0
0
SEL  
MUTE  
ADPON:  
This bit sets audio data compressed/uncompressed.  
When "0", the audio data uses uncompressed mode. (default)  
When "1", the audio mode is compressed mode.  
BITSL1, BITSL0: These bits set the audio data compression mode.  
BITSL1 BITSL0  
Compression mode  
0
0
1
0
1
0
4 bits  
6 bits  
8 bits  
: preset  
ADPWO:  
The CD-DSP block LRCK and shock-proof memory controller block LRCK are resynchronized.  
This command should be used when the read speed is changed by $A7 commands  
READ2, READS2 and READS1.  
When "0", not resynchronized. (default)  
When "1", resynchronized.  
Note) • Set the $AD command CDDSP SLEEP to 0 for resynchronization.  
ADPWO should be returned to "0" after ADPWO is set to "1" and one or more  
LRCK cycle of CD-DSP block is waited.  
GRSEL:  
This bit selects the GRSCOR signal output. Note that GRSCOR is output from the WDCK  
pin when $8 command SCOR SEL = 1.  
When "0", the GRSCOR signal is output at the timing used inside the shock-proof memory  
controller block. (default)  
When "1", the GRSCOR signal generated by the CD DSP block is output.  
This bit selects ADPCM compensation.  
ADPCM SEL:  
When "0", ADPCM is not compensated.  
When "1", ADPCM is compensated.  
ADPCM MUTE: This bit sets mute at ADPCM compensation.  
When "0", it does not mute at ADPCM compensation.  
When "1", it mutes at ADPCM compensation.  
ORMU:  
This bit controls the output signal from the LRMU pin.  
When "0", the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output) is output.  
When "1", the OR output is made with the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output)  
and SYSM.  
– 73 –  
CXD3048R  
$AB commands (preset: $AB000000)  
Data 4  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AB  
(EFM playability  
enhancement  
setting)  
ARD  
TEN  
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
ARDTEN:  
This is the EFM playability enhancement setting.  
When "0", the EFM playability enhancement function is off.  
When "1", the EFM playability enhancement function is on.  
Set this command in the condition when a disc is not being played back.  
– 74 –  
CXD3048R  
$AC commands (preset: $AC0C001)  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AC  
(Sync expansion  
specification)  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
AVW  
0
SFP5 SFP4 SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0  
Data 5  
Data 6  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
REF SLIM SLIM  
OV4 OV3 OV2 OV1 OV0  
SEL2  
1
0
AVW:  
This bit sets the sync protection window width automatic expansion function.  
When "0", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is off.  
When "1", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is on.  
This setting is not affected by the sync forward protection times setting SFP5 to SFP0.  
The sync protection window width (±6 channel clocks when WSEL = 0, ±26 channel  
clocks when WSEL = 1) is widened 32 channel clocks at a time each time a sync mark  
is inserted during the interval from the 16th forward protection until GFS goes high. When  
the maximum window width is reached (when the window width exceeds 588 channel  
clocks), GTOP goes high.  
SFP5 to SFP0: These bits set the frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to 3F (h).  
For details on frame sync protection, see "§4-2. Frame Sync Protection".  
Part of this command bit register is also used by $C SFP3 to SFP0. Of $AC SFP3 to  
SFP0 or $C SFP3 to SFP0, the command bit setting made last is valid. When using an  
existing status, set the value with $C SFP5 to SFP0. When using the $AC commands,  
set $AC SFP3 to SFP0 to the value set by $C SFP3 to SFP0.  
REFSEL2:  
SLIM1, 0:  
This bit sets the refresh rate to DRAM.  
See the description of $A7 command REFSEL.  
This bit sets the DRAM write speed limit value.  
SLIM1  
SLIM0  
Write speed limit value  
Up to 4.0× speed write  
Up to 4.5× speed write  
Up to 5.0× speed write  
Up to 5.5× speed write  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: preset  
Note) This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.  
This bit sets the limit value of the speed violation number for one GRSCOR which is  
reflected to XWIH.  
OV4 to OV0:  
OV4 to OV0  
Limit value of speed violation number  
Can be set from 1 to 31 times.  
00000 to 11111  
: Preset value: 00001  
Note) • The violation speed is set with the $AC commands SLIM 1 and 0.  
This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.  
– 75 –  
CXD3048R  
$AD commands (preset: $AD040)  
Data 4  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AD  
HCAV ERCNT  
SLEEP SLEEP  
DSP DSSP ASYM ESP  
SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP SLEEP  
LPF DSUB ASEQ  
PCOL  
0
1
1
0
1
ADCPS  
(Sleep setting)  
ADCPS:  
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter.  
When "0", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to normal. (default)  
When "1", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to power saving.  
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSP block.  
DSP SLEEP:  
When "0", the DSP block operates normally. (default)  
When "1", the DSP block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power  
consumption.  
DSSP SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block.  
When "0", the DSSP block operates normally. (default)  
When "1", the DSSP block clock is stopped. In addition, the A/D converter and operational  
amplifier in the DSSP block are set to standby mode. This makes it possible to reduce  
power consumption.  
ASYM SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2.  
When "0", the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2 operate normally. (default)  
When "1", the operational amplifier in the asymmetry correction circuit is set to standby  
mode. In addition, the multiplier PLL VCO1 and wide-band PLL VCO2 oscillation are  
stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption.  
ESP SLEEP:  
This bit sets the operating mode of the shock-proof memory controller block.  
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block operates normally. (default)  
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block clock is stopped. This makes it possible  
to reduce power consumption.  
LPF SLEEP:  
This bit sets the operating mode of the analog low-pass filter block.  
When "0", the analog low-pass filter block operates normally.  
When "1", the analog low-pass filter block is set to standby mode. (default) This makes it  
possible to reduce power consumption.  
DSUB SLEEP: This bit sets the operating mode of the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation  
circuit in the DAC block. This setting has no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the  
CD DSP block.  
When "0", the Ubit generation block operates normally. (default)  
When "1", The clock for the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation circuit in the  
DAC block is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption. Also, in this  
case Ubit is set to "0".  
ASEQ SLEEP: This bit sets the operation mode of the servo auto sequencer block.  
When "0", the servo auto sequencer operates normally. (default)  
When "1", the servo auto sequencer block clock is stopped. This makes the power  
consumption to be reduced.  
PCOL:  
The PCOL pin in DSP sleep mode is fixed to low.  
When "0", the PCO pin gradually becomes low by the external filter time constant. (default)  
When "1", the PCO pin digitally becomes low.  
Note) Set DSP SLEEP to "1" so that DSP sleep mode is entered.  
HCAV SLEEP: This bit sets the hard CAV block operation mode.  
When "0", the hard CAV block operates normally. (default)  
When "1", the hard CAV block clock is stopped. This makes the power consumption to be  
reduced.  
ERCNT SLEEP: This bit sets operation mode for the error rate counter block.  
When "0", normally operates. (default)  
When "1", the clock in the error rate counter block stops. This reduces the power consumption.  
The DAC block clock can be stopped by setting $A5 command PWDN (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1).  
– 76 –  
CXD3048R  
$AE commands (preset: $AE0)  
Data 4  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AE  
(Variable pitch  
setting)  
VARI VARI WTC SCSY SENS SENS SENS SENS  
1
1
1
0
ON USE C2PO (sub) SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0  
Processing  
Command bit  
VARION = 0  
VARION = 1  
Variable pitch mode is off. (The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)  
Variable pitch mode is on. (The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)  
Command bit  
VARIUSE = 0  
VARIUSE = 1  
Processing  
Set VARIUSE = 0 when not using variable pitch mode.  
Set VARIUSE = 1 when using variable pitch mode.  
See "$DX commands" for the variable pitch range and example of use.  
WTC C2PO:  
This bit selects the write prohibit factor to DRAM.  
When "0", write prohibition is not allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.  
When "1", write prohibition is allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.  
Use this command only when $8 CDROM = 0.  
Use this command in conjunction with the $AX command A11 SEL and $A4 commands  
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0.  
SCSY (sub):  
This bit sets the GRSCOR resynchronization period.  
See the $8X command SCSY. (Set the $8X command to "0" when using this bit.)  
SENS SEL3 to SENS SEL0:  
SENS SENS SENS SENS  
SEL3 SEL2 SEL1 SEL0  
SDTO TEXT SOCT SOCT XSOE XSOE  
SENS switching  
SENS serial data  
Subcode Q  
SOC2  
OUT OUT  
1
0
0
02  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Various signals  
Error rate  
CD-TEXT  
Shock-proof memory  
controller status  
Special area read  
Special area status  
VF0 to VF9  
1
1
1
1
1
– 77 –  
CXD3048R  
$AF commands (preset: $AF8000)  
Data 4  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
AF  
MDS MDP  
CTL UP  
MDP  
CTL4  
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 MDP  
EA EA EA  
MDP  
EA OUTSL1 OUTSL0  
(Spindle servo  
setting)  
0
1
1
1
1
LPWR2  
0
Data 5  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
MDP MDP MDP MDP  
CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0  
SYG3EA to SYG0EA:  
These bits set the spindle drive output gain. However, this is valid only in CLV-N mode.  
SYG3EA SYG2EA SYG1EA SYG0EA  
GAIN  
0 (– dB)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0.125 (–18.1dB)  
0.250 (–12.0dB)  
0.375 (–8.5dB)  
0.500 (–6.0dB)  
0.625 (–4.1dB)  
0.750 (–2.5dB)  
0.875 (–1.2dB)  
1.000 (0.0dB)  
1.125 (+1.0dB)  
1.250 (+1.9dB)  
1.375 (+2.8dB)  
1.500 (+3.5dB)  
1.625 (+4.2dB)  
1.750 (+4.9dB)  
1.875 (+5.5dB)  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
: preset  
MDP OUTSL1, MDP OUTSL0:  
These bits set the spindle drive output method.  
MDP OUTSL1  
MDP OUTSL0  
Spindle drive output  
Ternary output from the MDP pin  
Binary output from the MDS and MDP pins  
Command-based MDP and MDS output control  
: preset  
0
1
0
0
0
1
– 78 –  
CXD3048R  
LPWR2:  
The low output (brake pulse) of the MDP pin can be masked.  
When "0", binary output is high or low output, and ternary output is high, low or high  
impedance output. (default)  
When "1", high or high impedance is output. This makes it possible to mask the brake pulse.  
This bit sets the PWM output polarity according to the setting from the microcomputer.  
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)  
When "0", the MDS pin output is set low.  
MDS CTL:  
MDP UP:  
When "1", the MDS pin output is set high.  
This bit switches the MDP pin according to the setting from the microcomputer. (valid when  
MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)  
When "0", the MDP pin output is set to PWM output.  
When "1", the MDP pin output is set high.  
MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0:  
These bits set the PWM output value according to the setting from the microcomputer.  
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)  
The carrier frequency is 176.4kHz. (88.2kHz when set to quasi-double speed)  
At the minimum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 0), the MDP pin output is set low.  
At the maximum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 1F (h)), the MDP pin output is set high  
for 31/32 intervals.  
Note that when $AF command MDP UP = 1, the MDP pin output is set high regardless of  
the MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 setting value.  
Command-based MDP and MDS output control (MDP OUTSL1 = 0, MDP OUTSL0 = 1)  
(1) Timing Chart 1 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)  
5.67µs (176kHz)  
MDP  
The MDP waveform ratio is set by MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.  
When MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h), 10 (h)/20 (h) intervals are high.  
(2) Timing Chart 2 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 1, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)  
H
MDP  
When MDP UP = 1, MDP is fixed high regardless of MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.  
(3) Timing Chart 3 LPWR2 = 1, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)  
MDP  
Z
When LPWR2 = 1, the low output of MDP binary output becomes high impedance.  
– 79 –  
CXD3048R  
$BX commands  
This command sets the traverse monitor count.  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Command  
D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0  
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20  
Traverse monitor  
count setting  
When the set number of tracks are counted during fine search, the sled control for the traverse cycle control  
goes off.  
The traverse monitor count is set to monitor the traverse status using the SENS outputs COMP and COUT.  
The monitor output is set as follows.  
Data 5  
D2 D1  
Data 6  
Command  
D3  
0
D0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
Traverse monitor  
count setting  
0
MTSL1 MTSL0 ASYE MD2  
Command bit  
Output data  
MTSL1  
MTSL0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
XUGF  
XPCK  
MNT1  
XPCK  
FSTO  
GFS  
MNT2  
XROF  
GFS  
C2PO  
MNT3  
GTOP  
C2PO  
MINT0  
RFCK  
C4M  
: preset  
However, the $39 command SRO1 and $A7 command MON SEL must be set to "0".  
Command bit  
ASYE = 1  
Processing  
Asymmentry is on.  
Asymmentry is off.  
ASYE = 0  
: preset  
Command bit  
MD2 = 0  
Processing  
Digital Out on/off control. Off when "0".  
Digital Out on/off control. On when "1".  
MD2 = 1  
: preset  
– 80 –  
CXD3048R  
$CX commands  
Data 1  
D2 D1  
Gain Gain Gain Gain Gain Gain  
Data 2  
Command  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D2 D1  
D0  
Spindle servo  
PCC1 PCC0  
coefficient setting MDP1 MDP0 MDS1 MDS0 DCLV1 DCLV0  
Gain  
CLV CTRL ($DX)  
CLVS  
CLVS mode gain setting: GCLVS  
Gain  
MDS1 MDS0  
Gain  
Gain  
CLVS  
GCLVS  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
–12dB  
–6dB  
–6dB  
0dB  
0dB  
+6dB  
CLVP mode gain setting: GMDP: GMDS  
Gain  
MDP1 MDP0  
Gain  
Gain  
MDS1 MDS0  
Gain  
GMDP  
GMDS  
0
0
1
0
1
0
–6dB  
0dB  
0
0
1
0
1
0
–6dB  
0dB  
+6dB  
+6dB  
DCLV overall gain setting: GDCLV  
Gain  
DCLV1 DCLV0  
Gain  
GDCLV  
0
0
1
0
1
0
0dB  
+6dB  
+12dB  
Command bit  
Processing  
PCC1  
PCC0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The VPCO signal is output.  
The VPCO pin output is high impedance.  
The VPCO pin output is low.  
The VPCO pin output is high.  
This command controls the VPCO pin signal.  
The VPCO output can be controlled with this setting.  
– 81 –  
CXD3048R  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
Data 4  
D2 D1  
Command  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
Spindle servo  
coefficient setting  
SFP3 SFP2 SFP1 SFP0 SRP3 SRP2 SRP1 SRP0  
Command bit  
SFP3 to SFP0  
Processing  
Sets the number of frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).  
Command bit  
Processing  
SRP3 to SRP0  
Sets the number of frame sync backward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).  
See "§4-2. Frame Sync Protection" regarding frame sync protection.  
The CXD3048R can serially output the 40 bits (10 BCD codes) of error rate data selected by EDC7 to EDC0  
from the SQSO pin and monitor this data using a microcomputer.  
In order to output error rate data, set $C commands for C1 and C2 individually, and set $8 commands  
SOCT0 and SOCT1 to "1". Then, the data can be read out from the SQSO pin by sending 40 SQCK pulses.  
Data 5  
D2 D1  
Data 6  
D2 D1  
Command  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
Spindle servo  
coefficient setting  
EDC7 EDC6 EDC5 EDC4 EDC3 EDC2 EDC1 EDC0  
Preset value: 00h  
Error rate monitor commands  
Command bit  
Prpcessing  
EDC7 = 0 EDC6  
EDC5  
The [No C1 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [No C1 errors, pointer set] count is output When "1".  
EDC4  
EDC3  
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".  
The [Two C1 errors corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".  
The [C1 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".  
EDC2  
EDC1  
7350-frame count cycle mode 1 When "0".  
73500-frame count cycle mode 2 When "1".  
EDC0  
EDC7 = 1 EDC6  
EDC5  
The [No C2 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [One C2 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [Two C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [Three C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [Four C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".  
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer copy] count is output When "1".  
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".  
EDC4  
EDC3  
EDC2  
EDC1  
EDC0  
1
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,  
and output every 7350 frames.  
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,  
2
and output every 73500 frames.  
– 82 –  
CXD3048R  
$DX commands  
Data 1  
Command  
D3  
0
D2  
TB  
D1  
TP  
D0  
Gain  
CLVS  
CLV CTRL  
See "$CX commands".  
Description  
Command bit  
TB = 0  
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/32 in CLVS mode.  
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/16 in CLVS mode.  
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/4 in CLVS mode.  
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/2 in CLVS mode.  
TB = 1  
TP = 0  
TP = 1  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
Data 4  
Command  
CLV CTRL  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
D3  
VP  
D2  
VP  
D1  
0
D0  
0
VP7  
VP6 VP5  
VP4 VP3  
VP2 VP1  
VP0  
CTL1 CTL0  
The settings in CAV-W mode are as follows.  
Command bit  
Processing  
Sets the spindle rotational velocity.  
VP0 to VP7  
Command bit  
Processing  
VPCTL1  
VPCTL0  
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 1.  
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 2.  
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 3.  
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 4.  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
The above setting should be "0", "0" except for the CAV-W operating mode.  
– 83 –  
CXD3048R  
The rotational velocity R of the spindle can be expressed with the following equation.  
256 – n  
32  
R: Relative velocity at normal speed = 1  
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value  
R =  
× l  
l: Multiple set by VPCTL0, VPCTL1  
Command bit  
Description  
VP0 to VP7 = F0 (h)  
:
Playback at half (normal) speed  
to  
VP0 to VP7 = E0 (h) Playback at normal (double) speed  
:
to  
VP0 to VP7 = C0 (h)  
Playback at (quadruple) speed  
Notes) 1. Values when crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL is low or when crystal is 33.8688MHz and XTSL is high.  
2. Values in parentheses are for when DSPB is "1".  
4
3.5  
3
2.5  
2
DSPB = 1  
1.5  
1
DSPB = 0  
0.5  
F0  
E0  
D0  
C0  
VP0 to VP7 setting value [h]  
– 84 –  
CXD3048R  
The settings in variable pitch mode are as follows.  
Command bit  
Processing  
VPCTL1 to VPCTL0,  
VP7 to VP0  
Sets the pitch for variable pitch mode.  
The pitch setting can be expressed with the following equation.  
P: Pitch setting value  
–n  
10  
P =  
[%]  
n: VPCTL1 and VPCTL0, VP7 to VP0 setting value (two's complement,  
VPCTL1 = sign bit)  
Command bit  
VPCTL0 VP7 to VP0  
00 (H)  
Command setting  
example  
Pitch setting value [%]  
VPCTL1  
1
+51.2  
to  
$D60080  
:
0
1
0
1
FF (H)  
00 (H)  
+25.7  
+25.6  
to  
$D6FF80  
$D600C0  
:
1
0
0
FF (H)  
00 (H)  
+0.1  
0.0  
$D6FFC0  
$D60000  
:
to  
FF (H)  
00 (H)  
–25.5  
–25.6  
to  
$D6FF00  
$D60040  
:
E7 (H)  
–48.7  
$D6E740  
The pitch setting range is from –48.7 to +51.2%.  
The plus pitch setting should not exceed the playback speed given in the Recommended Operating Conditions.  
An example of variable pitch mode commands is shown below.  
$EX001 (Sets INV VPCO = 1.)  
$AE4  
$AEC  
(Setting to enable variable pitch mode.)  
(Turns on variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)  
$D60A00 (Sets the pitch to –1.0%.)  
$D60000 (Sets the pitch to 0.0%.)  
$AE4  
(Turns off variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)  
– 85 –  
CXD3048R  
$EX commands  
Command  
Data 1  
D2 D1  
Data 2  
D2 D1  
Data 3  
D2 D1  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
D3  
D0  
CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON  
SPD mode  
Command bit  
Mode  
Description  
CM3  
CM2  
CM1  
CM0  
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
STOP Spindle stop mode.  
1
KICK Spindle forward rotation mode.  
Spindle reverse rotation mode. Valid only when LPWR = 0  
in any mode.  
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
BRAKE  
1
Rough servo mode. When the RF-PLL circuit isn't locked,  
CLVS this mode is used to pull the disc rotations within the RF-  
PLL capture range.  
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
CLVP PLL servo mode.  
Automatic CLVS/CLVP switching mode.  
CLVA  
Used for normal playback.  
1
See Timing Charts 1-6 to 1-29.  
In the digital CLV servo, the sampling frequency of the internal digital filter is switched simultaneously with  
the switching of CLVP/CLVS.  
Then, the CLVS mode cut-off frequency fc is 70Hz when $D command TB = 0 or 140Hz when $D command  
TB = 1.  
Spindle control can be set to the ternary output of only MDP or the binary outputs of MDP and MDS by  
$AF commands MDPOUTSL1 and MDPOUTSL0.  
Command bit  
Mode  
Description  
INV  
VPCO  
EPWM SPDC ICAP SFSL VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON  
Crystal reference CLV  
servo.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
CLV-N  
CLV-N  
CLV-W  
CAV-W  
CAV-W  
VCO2 reference CLV  
servo.  
Used for playback in  
2
CLV-W mode.  
Spindle control with  
VP0 to VP7.  
Spindle control with the  
external PWM.  
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
3
VCO-C VCO control  
2
3
Figs. 3-1 and 3-2 show the control flow with the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode.  
Fig. 3-3 shows the control flow with the microcomputer software in VCO-C mode.  
– 86 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing chart –  
Ternary output  
Timing chart –  
Mode  
LPWR  
0
LPWR2  
0
Command  
Binary output  
1-18 (a)  
1-18 (b)  
1-18 (c)  
1-19 (a)  
1-19 (b)  
1-19 (c)  
1-20 (a)  
1-20 (b)  
1-20 (c)  
1-21 (a)  
1-21 (b)  
1-21 (c)  
1-22 (a)  
1-22 (b)  
1-22 (c)  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
1-6 (a)  
1-6 (b)  
1-6 (c)  
1-7 (a)  
1-7 (b)  
1-7 (c)  
1-8 (a)  
1-8 (b)  
1-8 (c)  
1-9 (a)  
1-9 (b)  
1-9 (c)  
1-10 (a)  
1-10 (b)  
1-10 (c)  
CLV-N  
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
CLV-W  
CAV-W  
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
Timing chart –  
Ternary output  
Timing chart –  
Binary output  
Mode  
LPWR  
LPWR2  
0
CLV-N  
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1-11  
1-23  
1-12  
1-24  
CLV-W  
CAV-W  
0
1-13  
1-25  
1-14 (EPWM = 0)  
1-15 (EPWM = 0)  
1-16 (EPWM = 1)  
1-17 (EPWM = 1)  
1-26 (EPWM = 0)  
1-27 (EPWM = 0)  
1-28 (EPWM = 1)  
1-29 (EPWM = 1)  
0
– 87 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing chart –  
Ternary output  
Timing chart –  
Mode  
LPWR  
0
LPWR2  
1
Command  
Binary output  
1-30 (a)  
1-30 (b)  
1-30 (c)  
1-31 (a)  
1-31 (b)  
1-31 (c)  
1-32 (a)  
1-32 (b)  
1-32 (c)  
1-33 (a)  
1-33 (b)  
1-33 (c)  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
1-8 (a)  
1-8 (b)  
1-8 (c)  
CLV-W  
1-8 (a)  
1-8 (b)  
1-8 (c)  
1
0
1
1
1
1
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
1-10 (a)  
1-10 (b)  
1-10 (c)  
1-10 (a)  
1-10 (b)  
1-10 (c)  
BRAKE  
STOP  
KICK  
CAV-W  
BRAKE  
STOP  
Timing chart –  
Ternary output  
Timing chart –  
Binary output  
Mode  
LPWR  
LPWR2  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1-13  
1-34  
CLV-W  
1-13  
1-35  
1-15 (EPWM = 0)  
1-15 (EPWM = 0)  
1-17 (EPWM = 1)  
1-17 (EPWM = 1)  
1-36 (EPWM = 0)  
1-37 (EPWM = 0)  
1-38 (EPWM = 1)  
1-39 (EPWM = 1)  
CAV-W  
1
Data 4  
Command  
SPD mode  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
Gain Gain  
CAV1 CAV0  
INV  
VPCO  
See page 86.  
This sets the gain when controlling the spindle with VP7 to  
Gain  
CAV1  
Gain  
CAV0  
Gain  
VP0 in CAV-W mode.  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0dB  
Note) The Gain CAV1 and Gain CAV0 commands are invalid  
–6dB  
–12dB  
–18dB  
for spindle control with the external PWM.  
– 88 –  
Timing Chart 1-3  
LRCK  
48 bit slot  
WDCK  
CDROM = 0  
C2PO  
If C2 Pointer = 1,  
data is NG  
Rch 16-bit C2 Pointer  
Lch 16-bit C2 Pointer  
CDROM = 1  
C2PO  
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits  
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits  
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits  
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits  
Rch C2 Pointer  
Lch C2 Pointer  
Timing Chart 1-4  
750ns to 120µs  
1
2
3
80  
81  
96  
SQCK  
CRCF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D13  
D14  
L/R  
SQSO  
Subcode Q data  
See "Subcode Interface"  
15-bit peak data  
Absolute value display, LSB first  
Peak data  
L/R flag  
1
2
3
1
2
3
WFCK  
SQCK  
SQSO  
96 clock pulses  
96 clock pulses  
L/R  
CRCF  
R/L  
CRCF  
16 bits  
96-bit data  
Peak data of this section  
Hold section  
Level Meter Timing  
Timing Chart 1-5  
1
2
3
1
2
3
WFCK  
SQCK  
96 clock pulses  
96 clock pulses  
CRCF  
Measurement  
CRCF  
CRCF  
Measurement  
Measurement  
Peak Meter Timing  
CXD3048R  
Ternary output from MDP pin ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 0, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)  
Timing Chart 1-6  
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
Z
H
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
Z
L
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-7  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
Z
H
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
Z
L
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-8  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
MDP  
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-9  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
Z
H
MDP  
L
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-10  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
Z
Z
MDP  
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
– 92 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-11  
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
n · 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31  
Acceleration  
Z
MDP  
132kHz  
7.6µs  
Deceleration  
Timing Chart 1-12  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
Z
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Deceleration  
Timing Chart 1-13  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
Z
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
Timing Chart 1-14  
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
MDP  
Z
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Deceleration  
Timing Chart 1-15  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
Z
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
– 93 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-16  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
H
PWMI  
L
Acceleration  
H
MDP  
L
Deceleration  
Timing Chart 1-17  
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
H
PWMI  
MDP  
L
Acceleration  
H
Z
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
Binary output from MDP and MDS pins ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 1, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)  
Timing Chart 1-18  
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
L
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
H
L
L
L
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-19  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
L
H
H
L
L
L
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
– 94 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-20  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
H
BRAKE  
STOP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
L
L
L
Timing Chart 1-21  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
L
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
H
MDP  
L
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-22  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
MDP  
L
L
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
– 95 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-23  
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
MDS  
L
Acceleration  
Deceleration  
H
MDP  
132kHz  
7.6µs  
n · 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31  
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1  
Timing Chart 1-24  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
MDS  
L
L
Acceleration  
Deceleration  
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1  
Timing Chart 1-25  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
H
L
MDS  
Acceleration  
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
Timing Chart 1-26  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
Deceleration  
L
L
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
MDS  
– 96 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-27  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 0  
Acceleration  
L
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
H
MDS  
Timing Chart 1-28  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0  
H
PWMI  
L
Acceleration  
H
MDS  
MDP  
L
Deceleration  
H
Timing Chart 1-29  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0  
H
PWMI  
L
H
MDS  
Acceleration  
H
MDP  
– 97 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-30  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
L
H
H
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-31  
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
Z
Z
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-32  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1  
KICK  
BRAKE  
L
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
H
MDP  
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
Timing Chart 1-33  
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1  
KICK  
BRAKE  
STOP  
H
MDS  
MDS  
MDP  
MDS  
MDP  
H
MDP  
Z
Z
(a) KICK  
(b) BRAKE  
(c) STOP  
– 98 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-34  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1  
MDS  
Acceleration  
Deceleration  
Z
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1  
Timing Chart 1-35  
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1  
H
Z
MDS  
Acceleration  
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
Timing Chart 1-36  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1  
Acceleration  
Deceleration  
Z
L
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
MDS  
– 99 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 1-37  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 1  
Acceleration  
Z
MDP  
264kHz  
3.8µs  
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.  
H
MDS  
Timing Chart 1-38  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1  
H
PWMI  
L
Acceleration  
H
MDS  
MDP  
L
Deceleration  
H
Timing Chart 1-39  
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1  
H
PWMI  
L
H
MDS  
Acceleration  
H
Z
MDP  
– 100 –  
CXD3048R  
[2] Subcode Interface  
There are two methods for reading out a subcode externally.  
The 8-bit subcodes P to W can be read out from SBSO by inputting EXCK.  
The subcode-Q can be read out after checking CRC of the 80 bits in the subcode frame.  
The subcode-Q can be read out from the SQSO pin by inputting 80 clock pulses to the SQCK pin when SCOR  
comes correctly and CRCF is high.  
§2-1. P to W Subcode Readout  
Data can be read out by inputting EXCK immediately after WFCK falls. (See Timing Chart 2-1.)  
§2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout  
Fig. 2-2 shows the peripheral block of the 80-bit subcode-Q register.  
First, subcode-Q, regenerated at one bit per frame, is input to the 80-bit serial/parallel register and the CRC  
check circuit.  
96-bit subcode-Q is input, and if the CRC is OK, it is output to SQSO with CRCF = 1. In addition, 80 bits are  
loaded into the parallel/serial register.  
When SQSO goes high after SCOR is output, the CPU determines that new data (which passed the CRC  
check) has been loaded.  
When the 80-bit data is loaded, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,  
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.  
Once the 80-bit data load is confirmed, SQCK is input so that the data can be read.  
The SQCK input is detected, and the retriggerable monostable multivibrator is reset while the input is low.  
The retriggerable monostable multivibrator has a time constant from 270 to 400µs. When the duration when  
SQCK is high is less than this time constant, the monostable multivibrator is kept reset; during this interval,  
the serial/parallel register is not loaded into the parallel/serial register.  
While the monostable multivibrator is being reset, data cannot be loaded in the peak detection parallel/serial  
register or the 80-bit parallel/serial register.  
In other words, while reading out with a clock cycle shorter than this time constant, these registers will not be  
rewritten by CRCOK and others.  
The previously mentioned peak detection register can be connected to the shift-in of the 80-bit parallel/serial  
register.  
For ring control 1, input and output are shorted during peak meter and level meter modes.  
For ring control 2, input and output are shorted during peak meter mode.  
This is because the register is reset with each readout in level meter mode, and to prevent readout  
destruction in peak meter mode.  
As a result, the 96-bit clock must be input in peak meter mode.  
The absolute time after peak is stored in the memory in peak meter mode as noted in "Description of peak  
meter mode" on page 95. See Timing Chart 2-3.  
The clock is input from the SQCK pin to perform these operations. The high and low intervals of the clock  
should be between 750ns and 120µs.  
– 101 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 2-1  
Internal  
PLL clock  
4.3218 ± MHz  
WFCK  
SCOR  
EXCK  
SBSO  
750ns max  
S0 · S1  
Q
R
WFCK  
SCOR  
EXCK  
SBSO  
S0·S1  
S0·S1  
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
P1  
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
P1  
P2  
P3  
Same  
Same  
Subcode P.Q.R.S.T.U.V.W Read Timing  
– 102 –  
Block Diagram 2-2  
(AFRAM)  
(ASEC)  
(AMIN)  
ADDRS CTRL  
80-bit S/P Register  
SUBQ  
SIN  
A
B C D E F G H  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Order  
Inversion  
H G F E D C B  
SI  
A
SO  
80-bit P/S Register  
ABS time load control  
for peak value  
Monostable  
multivibrator  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SQCK  
CRCC  
LOAD CONTROL  
SO  
SI  
CRCF  
Mix  
Ring control 1  
16-bit P/S register  
Ring control 2  
SQSO  
16  
Peak detection  
Timing Chart 2-3  
1
3
91  
1
92  
2
93  
3
94  
2
98  
95  
96  
97  
WFCK  
SCOR  
Determined by mode  
SQSO  
SQCK  
CRCF1  
CRCF1  
CRCF2  
80 or 96 Clock  
Register load forbidder  
Monostable  
multivibrator  
(Internal)  
270 to 400µ when SQCK = high.  
750ns to 120µs  
SQCK  
SQSO  
CRCF  
ADR0  
ADR1  
ADR2  
ADR3  
CTL0  
CTL1  
CTL2  
CTL3  
300ns max  
Timing Chart 2-4  
Example: $802000 latch  
Set SQCK high during this interval.  
XLAT  
750ns or more  
Internal signal latch  
SQCK  
SQSO  
PER0  
PER1  
PER2  
PER3  
PER4  
PER5  
PER6  
PER7  
C1F0  
C1F1  
C1F2  
C2F0  
C2F1  
C2F2  
FOK  
GFS  
LOCK EMPH ALOCK  
VF0  
VF1  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
VF8  
VF9  
Signal  
Description  
PER0 to PER7 RF jitter amount (used to adjust the focus bias). 8-bit binary data in PER0 = LSB, PER7 = MSB.  
FOK  
GFS  
Focus OK.  
High when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.  
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight consecutive samples, this pin  
outputs low.  
LOCK  
EMPH  
ALOCK  
High when the playback disc has emphasis.  
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high eight consecutive samples, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight  
consecutive samples, this pin outputs low.  
Used in CAV-W mode. The result obtained by measuring the rotational velocity of the disc. (See Timing Chart 2-5.) VF0 = LSB,  
VF9 = MSB.  
VF0 to VF9  
C1F2  
C1F1  
C1F0  
Description  
No C1 errors; C1 pointer reset  
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer reset  
C2F2  
C2F1  
C2F0  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No C2 errors; C2 pointer reset  
One C2 error corrected; C2 pointer reset  
Two C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset  
Three C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset  
Four C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset  
No C1 errors; C1 pointer set  
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer set  
Two C1 errors corrected; C1 pointer set  
C1 correction impossible; C1 pointer set  
C2 correction impossible; C1 pointer copy  
C2 correction impossible; C2 pointer set  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 2-5  
Measurement interval (approximately 3.8µs)  
Reference window  
(132.2kHz)  
Measurement pulse  
(V16M/2)  
Measurement counter  
VF0 to VF9  
Load  
m
The relative velocity of the disc can be obtained with the following equation.  
m + 1  
R =  
(R: Relative velocity, m: Measurement results)  
32  
VF0 to VF9 is the result obtained by counting V16M/2 pulses while the reference signal (132.2kHz) generated  
from XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) is high. This value is 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed and 63  
when it is rotating at double speed (when DSPB is low).  
XLAT  
Set SQCK high during this period.  
750ns or more  
SQCK  
"H" or "L"  
SQSO  
VF0  
VF1  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
VF8  
VF9  
– 106 –  
Timing Chart 2-6  
XLAT  
SQCK  
SQSO  
C1 MSB 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C1 error rate  
C2 error rate  
0
7
3
5
0
0
7
3
5
0
CXD3048R  
[3] Description of Modes  
This LSI has three basic operating modes using a combination of spindle control and the PLL. The operations  
for each mode are described below.  
§3-1. CLV-N Mode  
This mode is compatible with the CXD2510Q, and operation is the same as for conventional control. The PLL  
capture range is ±150kHz.  
§3-2. CLV-W Mode  
This is the wide capture range mode. This mode allows the conventional PLL to follow the rotational velocity of  
the disc. This rotational following control uses the built-in VCO2. The spindle is the same CLV servo as for the  
conventional series. Operation using the built-in VCO2 is described below.  
When starting to rotate the disc and/or speeding up to the lock range from the condition where the disc is  
stopped, CAV-W mode should be used. Specifically, first send $E665X to set CAV-W mode and kick the disc,  
then send $E60CX to set CLV-W mode if ALOCK is high, which can be read out serially from the SQSO pin.  
CLV-W mode can be used while ALOCK is high. The microcomputer monitors the serial data output, and must  
return the operation to the speed adjusting state (CAV-W mode) when ALOCK becomes low. The control flow  
according to the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode is shown in Fig. 3-2.  
In CLV-W mode (normal), low power consumption is achieved by setting LPWR high. Control was formerly  
performed by applying acceleration and deceleration pulses to the spindle motor. However, when LPWR is set  
high, deceleration pulses are not output, thereby achieving low power consumption mode.  
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.  
§3-3. CAV-W Mode  
This is CAV mode. In this mode, the external clock is fixed and it is possible to control the spindle to the  
desired rotational velocity. The rotational velocity is determined by the VP0 to VP7 setting values or the  
external PWM. When controlling the spindle with VP0 to VP7, setting CAV-W mode with the $E665X command  
and controlling VP0 to VP7 with the $DX commands allows the rotational velocity to be varied from low speed  
to quadruple speed. (See "$DX commands".) When controlling the spindle with the external PWM, the PWMI  
pin is binary input which becomes KICK during high intervals and BRAKE during low intervals.  
The microcomputer can know the rotational velocity using the internal master clock frequency as the  
parameter. With XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) as the reference frequency, the result after measuring the high  
interval by the internal master clock is output in 10 bits (VP0 to VP9) from the new CPU interface. These  
measurement results are 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed or 127 when it is rotating at quadruple  
speed. These values match those of the 256 – n for control with VP0 to VP7. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)  
In CAV-W mode, the spindle is set to the desired rotational velocity and the operation speed for the entire  
system follows this rotational velocity. Therefore, the cycles for the Fs system clock, PCM data and all other  
output signals from this LSI change according to the rotational velocity of the disc.  
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.  
Note) Set FLFC to "1" for this mode  
– 108 –  
CXD3048R  
§3-4. VCO-C Mode  
This is VCO control mode. In this mode, the oscillation frequency of the internal master clock (VCLK) can be  
controlled by setting $D commands VP0 to VP7 and VPCTL0, 1. The VCLK oscillation frequency can be  
expressed by the following equation.  
1 (256 – n)  
32  
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value  
1: VPCTL0, 1 setting value  
VCLK =  
The VCO1 oscillation frequency is determined by VCLK. The VCO1 frequency can be expressed by the  
following equation.  
When DSPB = 0  
49  
VCO1 = VCLK ×  
24  
When DSPB = 1  
49  
VCO1 = VCLK ×  
16  
– 109 –  
CXD3048R  
Operation mode  
Spindle mode  
CAV-W  
CLVS  
CLV-W  
CLVP  
Rotational velocity  
Target speed  
KICK  
Time  
LOCK  
ALOCK  
Fig. 3-1. Disc Stop to Regular Playback in CLV-W Mode  
CLV-W Mode  
CLV-W MODE  
START  
KICK  
$E8000  
Mute OFF $A00XXXX  
CAV-W $E665X  
(CLVA)  
NO  
ALOCK = H ?  
YES  
CLV-W $E60CX  
(CLVA)  
(WFCK PLL)  
YES  
ALOCK = L ?  
NO  
Fig. 3-2. CLV-W Mode Flow Chart  
– 110 –  
CXD3048R  
VCO-C Mode  
Access START  
R?  
What is the playback speed when access ends?  
(How many minutes  
of absolute time?)  
n?  
Calculate VP0 to VP7.  
(Calculate n)  
Switch to VCO control mode.  
EPWM = SPDC = ICAP = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0  
HIFC = VPON = 1  
Transfer  
$E00510  
Transfer  
Transfer VP0 to VP7. (  
corresponds to VP0 to VP7.)  
$DX  
XX  
Track Jump  
Subroutine  
Switch to normal-speed playback mode.  
EPWM = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0  
SPDC = ICAP = HIFC = VPON = 1  
Transfer  
$E66500  
Access END  
Fig. 3-3. Access Flow Chart Using VCO Control  
– 111 –  
CXD3048R  
[4] Description of other functions  
§4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit  
• The channel clock is necessary for demodulating the EFM signal regenerated by the optical system.  
Assuming T as the channel clock cycle, the EFM signal is modulated in an integer multiple of T from 3T to  
11T.  
In order to read the information in the EFM signal, this integer value must be read correctly. As a result, T,  
that is the channel clock, is necessary.  
In an actual player, a PLL is necessary to recover the channel clock because the fluctuation in the spindle  
rotation alters the width of the EFM signal pulses.  
The block diagram of this PLL is shown in Fig. 4-1.  
The CXD3048R has a built-in three-stage PLL.  
• The first-stage PLL is a wide-band PLL. When using the internal VCO2, an external LPF is necessary.  
The output of this first-stage PLL is used as a reference for all clocks within the LSI.  
• The second-stage PLL generates the high-frequency clock needed by the third-stage digital PLL.  
• The third-stage PLL is a digital PLL that recovers the actual channel clock.  
• The digital PLL in CLV-N mode has a secondary loop, and is controlled by the primary loop (phase) and the  
secondary loop (frequency). When FLFC = 1, the secondary loop can be turned off. High frequency  
components such as 3T and 4T may contain deviations. In such cases, turning the secondary loop off yields  
better playability. However, in this case the capture range becomes ±50kHz.  
• A new digital PLL has been provided for CLV-W mode to follow the rotational velocity of the disc in addition to  
the conventional secondary loop.  
– 112 –  
CXD3048R  
Block Diagram 4-1  
CLV-W  
CAV-W  
Spindle rotation information  
Clock input  
XTAI  
VPCO  
1/2  
1/32  
CLV-N  
XTSL  
1/2  
1/l  
1/n  
CLV-W  
CAV-W  
/CLV-N  
LPF  
l = 1, 2, 3, 4  
(VPCTL0, 1)  
n = 1 to 256  
(VP7 to 0)  
VCOSEL2  
Microcomputer  
control  
VCTL  
1/K  
VCO2  
(KSL1, KSL0)  
2/1 MUX  
VPON  
1/M  
1/N  
PCO  
FILI  
FILO  
CLTV  
1/K  
VCO1  
(KSL3, KSL2)  
VCOSEL1  
Digital PLL  
RFPLL  
– 113 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-2. Frame Sync Protection  
In normal-speed playback, a frame sync is recorded approximately every 136µs (7.35kHz). This signal is  
used as a reference to recognize the data within a frame. Conversely, if the frame sync cannot be  
recognized, the data is processed as error data because the data cannot be recognized. As a result,  
recognizing the frame sync properly is extremely important for improving playability.  
In the CXD3048R, window protection and forward protection/backward protection have been adopted for  
frame sync protection. These functions achieve very powerful frame sync protection. There are two window  
widths; one for cases where a rotational disturbance affects the player and the other for cases where there is  
no rotational disturbance (WSEL = 0/1). In addition, the forward protection counter is set to 12 , and the  
backward protection counter to 3 . Concretely, when the frame sync is being played back normally and then  
cannot be detected due to scratches, etc., a maximum of 12 frames are inserted. If the frame sync cannot be  
detected for 13 frames or more, the window opens to resynchronize the frame sync.  
In addition, immediately after the window opens and the resynchronization is executed, if a proper frame  
sync cannot be detected within 3 frames, the window opens immediately.  
Default values. These values can be set as desired by $C commands SFP3 to SFP0 and SRP3 to SRP0.  
§4-3. Error Correction  
In the CD format, one 8-bit data contains two error correction codes, C1 and C2. For C1 correction, the code  
is created with 28-byte information and 4-byte C1 parity.  
For C2 correction, the code is created with 24-byte information and 4-byte parity.  
Both C1 and C2 are Reed-Solomon codes with a minimum distance of 5.  
The CXD3048R uses refined super strategy to achieve double correction for C1 and quadruple correction for  
C2.  
In addition, to prevent C2 miscorrection, a C1 pointer is attached to data after C1 correction according to the  
C1 error status, the playback status of the EFM signal and the operating status of the player.  
The correction status can be monitored externally.  
See Table 4-2.  
When the C2 pointer is high, the data in question was uncorrectable. Either the pre-value was held or an  
average value interpolation was made for the data.  
MNT3  
MNT2  
MNT1  
MNT0  
Description  
C1 pointer reset  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No C1 errors;  
One C1 error corrected;  
C1 pointer reset  
No C1 errors;  
C1 pointer set  
C1 pointer set  
C1 pointer set  
C1 pointer set  
C2 pointer reset  
C2 pointer reset  
C2 pointer reset  
C2 pointer reset  
C2 pointer reset  
One C1 error corrected;  
Two C1 errors corrected;  
C1 correction impossible;  
No C2 errors;  
One C2 error corrected;  
Two C2 errors corrected;  
Three C2 errors corrected;  
Four C2 errors corrected;  
C2 correction impossible;  
C2 correction impossible;  
C1 pointer copy  
C2 pointer set  
Table 4-2.  
– 114 –  
CXD3048R  
Timing Chart 4-3  
Normal-speed PB  
400 to 500ns  
RFCK  
MNT3  
t = Dependent on error  
condition  
C1 correction  
C2 correction  
MNT2  
MNT1  
MNT0  
Strobe  
Strobe  
§4-4. DA Interface  
The DA interface supports the 48-bit slot interface.  
48-bit slot interface  
This interface includes 48 cycles of the bit clock within one LRCK cycle, and is MSB first.  
When LRCK is high, the data is for the left channel.  
The output format from the bass boost block supports 18 bits and 20 bits in addition to 16 bits.  
– 115 –  
Timing Chart 4-4  
48-bit Slot Normal-speed Playback  
LRCK  
(44.1K)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
24  
BCK  
(2.12M)  
WDCK  
PCMD  
R0  
L14  
L13 L12  
L11 L10  
L9  
L8  
L7  
L6  
L5  
L4  
L3  
L2  
L1  
L0  
Rch MSB  
Lch MSB (15)  
48-bit Slot Double-speed Playback  
LRCK  
(88.2K)  
1
2
24  
BCK  
(4.23M)  
WDCK  
PCMD  
R0  
Rch MSB  
L0  
Lch MSB (15)  
Timing Chart 4-5 (DAC output selected)  
SDSL1 = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 1  
LRCK  
(44.1K)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
24  
BCK  
(2.12M)  
WDCK  
PCMD  
R0  
L16 L15  
L14  
L13 L12  
L11 L10  
L9  
L9  
L8  
L8  
L7  
L7  
L6  
L6  
L5  
L5  
L4  
L4  
L3  
L3  
L2  
L2  
L1  
L1  
L0  
Rch MSB  
Rch MSB  
Lch MSB (17)  
SDSL = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 0  
PCMD  
R0  
L14  
L13 L12  
L11 L10  
L0  
L18 L17 L16 L15  
Lch MSB (19)  
CXD3048R  
§4-5. Digital Out  
There are three Digital Out: the type 1 format for broadcasting stations, the type 2 form 1 format for home use,  
and the type 2 form 2 format for the manufacture of software.  
The CXD3048R supports type 2 form 1.  
This LSI supports two kinds of Digital Out generation methods; generation from the PCM data read out from  
the disc, and generation from the DA interface inputs (PCMDI, LRCKI, BCKI).  
The timing accuracy of output data depends on the signal accuracy input  
to XTAI, XTAO pins in CLV-N mode, and the built-in VCO accuracy in VCO-C mode.  
§4-5-1. Digital Out from PCM Data  
The Digital Out is generated from the PCM data which is read out from the disc.  
The clock accuracy of the channel status is automatically set to level II when the crystal clock is used and to  
level III in CAV-W mode, VCO-C mode or variable pitch mode. In addition, the subcode-Q data matched twice  
in succession with CRC check are input to the initial 4 bits (bits 0 to 3).  
DOUT is output when the crystal is 34MHz and XTSL is high in CLV-N or CLV-W mode with DSPB = 1.  
Therefore, DOUT is set to off by setting the $B command MD2 to "0".  
Digital Out C bit  
0
1
2
3
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
1
9
0
10  
0
11  
0
12  
0
13  
0
14  
0
15  
0
From sub Q  
ID0 ID1 COPY Emph  
0
16  
32  
48  
0/1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
176  
bit0 to 3 Subcode-Q control bits that matched twice in succesion with CRCOK  
bit29  
VPON or VARION: 1  
Crystal: 0  
Table 4-5-1.  
– 118 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-5-2. Digital Out from DA Interface Input  
The Digital Out is generated from the DA interface input.  
Validity Flag and User Data  
The Validity Flag is fixed to "0".  
The User Data is fixed to "0" or it can be output according to the format by setting 0 data.  
For the Q data, first set the Q1 to Q80 data using the $A90 to $A99 commands, then the set data can be  
output according to the digital interface format using the $A9A command. In addition, CRC operations are  
performed internally on the Q81 to Q96 data and then this data is output.  
The data is output in the order shown in Table 4-5-2.  
The setting flow is shown in Figs. 4-5 (a) and 4-5 (b). Fig. 4-5 (a) shows the case when changing all the data,  
and Fig. 4-5 (b) the case when changing the INDEX, movement time and absolute time.  
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
:
3
0
0
0
0
0
:
4
0
0
0
0
0
:
5
0
0
0
0
0
:
6
0
0
0
0
0
:
7
0
0
0
0
0
:
8
0
0
0
0
0
:
9
0
0
0
0
0
:
10  
0
0
0
0
0
:
11  
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
12  
24  
36  
48  
:
0
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
:
1164  
1
Q96  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 4-5-2.  
– 119 –  
CXD3048R  
Channel Status Data  
For the Channel Status Data, bits 0, 6 and 7 are fixed to "0". The following items can be set by bits 1, 2, 3 and 8.  
a) Digital data/audio data  
b) Digital copy enabled/prohibited  
c) With/without emphasis  
d) Category code (2 types possible)  
Digital Out C bit  
0
0
1
2
3
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
9
0
10  
0
11  
0
12  
0
13  
0
14  
0
15  
0
A/D COPYEMPH  
SEL  
CAT  
b8  
0
16  
32  
48  
En  
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
176  
Table 4-5-3.  
Note) In this method, DOUT can be set to off by setting $B command MD2 to "0" and $34A command  
DOUT EN to "0".  
– 120 –  
CXD3048R  
START  
$A900  
:
$A990  
Set the subcode-Q information.  
Input with BCD code.  
Wait time 13.3ms  
Output the subcode-Q information.  
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.  
$A9A0F0  
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)  
Stop subcode-Q information output to D-out.  
Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.  
$A9A040  
(DON = L, DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L)  
$A900  
:
$A990  
Set the subcode-Q information.  
Input with BCD code.  
Wait time 13.3ms  
Input $A9A0F0  
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)  
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)  
Fig. 4-5(a). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data  
START  
$A900  
:
$A990  
Set the subcode-Q information.  
Input with BCD code.  
Wait time 13.3ms  
Output the subcode-Q information.  
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.  
$A9A0F0  
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)  
$A9A0C8  
(DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L, DLD = H)  
(Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.)  
$A920  
$A930  
:
INDEX  
Movement  
time  
Note) The INDEX, movement and absolute time data  
$A950  
$A970  
:
output to D-out while making the settings is all "0".  
Absolute  
time  
$A990  
Wait time 13.3ms  
Input $A9A0F0  
(DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H, DLD = L)  
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)  
Fig. 4-5(b). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data  
– 121 –  
CXD3048R  
Digital Audio Data Input  
The input signal of the digital audio data is input through the DAC input signal pins PCMDI, LRCKI and BCKI.  
The input format supports the 48-bit slot, MSB first.  
Mute Function  
By setting the command bit DOUT_DMUT to "1", all the audio data portions in the Digital Out output can be  
set to "0" without altering the Channel Status Data.  
Input/Output Synchronization Circuit  
In normal operation, the DAC automatically synchronizes with the input LRCK. However, synchronization may  
not be achieved when the input data contains much jitter or during power-on, etc. In such cases, internal  
operation should be forcibly resynchronized by setting the $34A command DOUT WOD to "1". Forced  
synchronization is also required when the operating frequency is changed such as switching between CLV and  
CAV, etc. Be sure to set DOUT WOD to "0" and then to "1" for forced resynchronization.  
Resynchronization clears the internal frame counter so that the count starts over from frame 0 after the  
resynchronization processing. In cases where automatic resynchronization processing is not desirable or the  
user wants to do it manually, set the $34A command WINEN to "0" to disable the resynchronization circuit.  
DOUT Circuit Clock System  
For the DOUT block, the master clock is set using the clock control command MCSL ($A) employed by the  
DAC block. Set MCSL to "1" for 768fs, and to "0" for 384fs.  
– 122 –  
DOUT Block Input Timing Chart  
48-bit slot  
LRCK  
24  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
BCKI  
PCMDI  
R0  
L14 L13  
L12 L11 L10  
L9  
L8  
L7  
L6  
L5  
L4  
L3  
L2  
L1  
L0  
Rch MSB  
Lch MSB (15)  
CXD3048R  
§4-6. Servo Auto Sequence  
This function performs a series of controls, including auto focus and track jumps. When the auto sequence  
command is received from the CPU, auto focus, 1-track jump, 2N-track jump, fine search and M-track move  
are executed automatically.  
The servo block operates according to the built-in program during the auto sequence execution (when XBUSY =  
low), so that commands from the CPU, that is $0, 1, 2 and 3 commands, are not accepted. ($4 to E commands  
are accepted.) When the auto sequencer is used, $9X command A.SEC ON-OFF is turned on.  
In addition, when using the auto sequence, turn the A.SEQ ON-OFF of register 9 on.  
When CLOK goes from low to high while XBUSY is low, XBUSY does not become high for a maximum of  
100µs after that point. This is to prevent the transfer of erroneous data to the servo when XBUSY changes  
from low to high by the monostable multivibrator, which is reset by CLOK being low (when XBUSY is low).  
In addition, a MAX timer is built into this LSI as a countermeasure against abnormal operation due to external  
disturbances, etc. When the auto sequence command is sent from the CPU, this command assumes a $4XY  
format, in which X specifies the command and Y sets the MAX timer value and timer range. If the executed  
auto sequence command does not terminate within the set timer value, the auto sequence is interrupted (like  
$40). See "[1] $4X commands" concerning the timer value and range. Also, the MAX timer is invalidated by  
inputting $4X0.  
Although this command is explained in the format of $4X in the following command descriptions, the timer  
value and timer range are actually sent together from the CPU.  
(a) Auto focus ($47)  
Focus search-up is performed, FOK and FZC are checked, and the focus servo is turned on.  
If $47 is received from the CPU, the focus servo is turned on according to Fig. 4-6. The auto focus starts with  
focus search-up, and note that the pickup should be lowered beforehand (focus search-down). In addition,  
blind E of register 5 is used to eliminate FZC chattering. Concretely, the focus servo is turned on at the falling  
edge of FZC after FZC has been continuously high for a longer time than E.  
(b) Track jump  
1, 10 and 2N-track jumps are performed respectively. Always use this when the focus, tracking, and sled  
servos are on. Note that tracking gain-up and braking-on ($17) should be sent beforehand because they are  
not involved in this sequence.  
1-track jump  
When $48 ($49 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 1-track jump is performed in accordance  
with Fig. 4-7. Set blind A and brake B with register 5.  
10-track jump  
When $4A ($4B for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 10-track jump is performed in  
accordance with Fig. 4-8. The principal difference from the 1-track jump is to kick the sled. In addition, after  
kicking the actuator, when 5 tracks have been counted through COUT, the brake is applied to the actuator.  
Then, when the actuator speed is found to have slowed up enough (determined by the COUT cycle  
becoming longer than the overflow C set with register 5), the tracking and sled servos are turned on.  
– 124 –  
CXD3048R  
2N-track jump  
When $4C ($4D for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 2N-track jump is performed in  
accordance with Fig. 4-9. The track jump count N is set with register 7. Although N can be set to 216 tracks,  
note that the setting is actually limited by the actuator. COUT is used for counting the number of jumps  
when N is less than 16, and MIRR is used when N is 16 or more.  
Although the 2N-track jump basically follows the same sequence as the 10-track jump, the one difference is  
that after the tracking servo is turned on, the sled continues to move only for "D", set with register 6.  
Fine search  
When $44 ($45 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) fine search (N-track jump) is performed  
in accordance with Fig. 4-10. The differences from a 2N-track jump are that a higher precision is achieved  
by controlling the traverse speed, and a longer distance jump can be performed by controlling the sled. The  
track jump count N is set with register 7. N can be set to 216 tracks. After kicking the actuator and sled, the  
traverse speed is controlled based on the overflow G. Set kick D and F with register 6 and overflow G with  
register 5. Also, sled speed control during traverse can be turned off by causing COMP to fall. Set the  
number of tracks during which COMP falls with register B. After N tracks have been counted through COUT,  
the brake is applied to the actuator and sled. (This is performed by turning on the tracking servo for the  
actuator, and by kicking the sled in the opposite direction during the time for kick D set with register 6.)  
Then, the tracking and sled servos are turned on.  
Set overflow G to the speed required to slow up just before the track jump terminates. (The speed should  
be such that it will come on-track when the tracking servo turns on at the termination of the track jump.) For  
example, set the target track count N – α for the traverse monitor counter which is set with register B, and  
COMP will be monitored. When the falling edge of this COMP is detected, overflow G can be set again.  
M-track move  
When $4E ($4F for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) M-track move is performed in  
accordance with Fig. 4-11. M can be set to 216 tracks. Like the 2N-track jump, COUT is used for counting  
the number of moves when M is less than 16, and MIRR is used when M is 16 or more. The M-track move  
is executed by moving only the sled, and is therefore suited for moving across several thousand to several  
ten-thousand tracks. In addition, the track and sled servos are turned off after M tracks have been counted  
through COUT or MIRR unlike for the other jumps. Transfer $25 from the microcomputer after the actuator  
has stabilized.  
– 125 –  
CXD3048R  
Auto focus  
Focus search-up  
FOK = H  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Check whether FZC is  
continuously high for  
the period of time E set  
with register 5.  
FZC = H  
YES  
FZC = L  
NO  
YES  
Focus servo ON  
END  
Fig. 4-6-(a). Auto Focus Flow Chart  
$47 Latch  
XLAT  
FOK  
FZC  
BUSY  
Command for  
DSSP block  
$08  
Blind E  
$03  
Fig. 4-6-(b). Auto Focus Timing Chart  
– 126 –  
CXD3048R  
1 Track  
Track FWD kick  
sled servo OFF  
(REV kick for REV jump)  
WAIT  
(Blind A)  
COUT =  
YES  
NO  
Track REV  
kick  
(FWD kick for REV jump)  
WAIT  
(Brake B)  
Track, sled  
servo ON  
END  
Fig. 4-7-(a). 1-Track Jump Flow Chart  
$48 (REV = $49) Latch  
XLAT  
COUT  
BUSY  
Blind A  
Brake B  
Command for  
DSSP block  
$25  
$28 ($2C)  
$2C ($28)  
Fig. 4-7-(b). 1-Track Jump Timing Chart  
– 127 –  
CXD3048R  
10 Track  
Track, sled  
FWD kick  
WAIT  
(Blind A)  
(Counts COUT × 5)  
COUT = 5 ?  
YES  
NO  
Track, REV  
kick  
Checks whether the COUT cycle  
is linger than overflow C.  
C = Overflow ?  
YES  
NO  
Track, sled  
servo ON  
END  
Fig. 4-8-(a). 10-Track Jump Flow Chart  
$4A (REV = $4B) Latch  
XLAT  
COUT  
BUSY  
COUT 5 counts  
Blind A  
Overflow C  
$25  
Command for  
DSSP block  
$2E ($2B)  
$2A ($2F)  
Fig. 4-8-(b). 10-Track Jump Timing Chart  
– 128 –  
CXD3048R  
2N Track  
Track, sled  
FWD kick  
WAIT  
(Blind A)  
Counts COUT for the first 16 times  
and MIRR for more times.  
COUT (MIRR) = N  
YES  
NO  
Track REV  
kick  
C = Overflow  
YES  
NO  
Track servo  
ON  
WAIT  
(Kick D)  
Sled servo  
ON  
END  
Fig. 4-9-(a). 2N-Track Jump Flow Chart  
$4C (REV = $4D) Latch  
XLAT  
COUT  
(MIRR)  
BUSY  
COUT (MIRR)  
N counts  
Kick D  
Blind A  
$2A ($2F)  
Overflow C  
$26 ($27)  
Command for  
DSSP block  
$2E ($2B)  
$25  
Fig. 4-9-(b). 2N-Track Jump Timing Chart  
– 129 –  
CXD3048R  
Fine Search  
Track Servo ON  
Sled FWD Kick  
WAIT  
(Kick D)  
Track Sled  
FWD Kick  
WAIT  
(Kick F)  
Traverse  
Speed Ctrl  
(Overflow G)  
COUT = N?  
YES  
NO  
Track Servo ON  
Sled REV Kick  
WAIT  
(Kick D)  
Track Sled  
Servo ON  
END  
Fig. 4-10-(a). Fine Search Flow Chart  
$44 (REV = $45) Latch  
XLAT  
COUT  
BUSY  
Kick D  
$26 ($27)  
Kick F  
Kick D  
$27 ($26)  
Traverse Speed Control (Overflow G)  
Command for  
DSSP block  
&
COUT N counts  
$2A ($2F)  
$25  
Fig. 4-10-(b). Fine Search Timing Chart  
– 130 –  
CXD3048R  
M Track Move  
Track Servo OFF  
Sled FWD Kick  
WAIT  
(Blind A)  
Counts COUT for M < 16.  
Counts MIRR for M 16.  
COUT (MIRR) = M  
YES  
NO  
Track, Sled  
Servo OFF  
END  
Fig. 4-11-(a). M-Track Move Flow Chart  
$4E (REV = $4F) Latch  
XLAT  
COUT  
(MIRR)  
BUSY  
COUT (MIRR)  
M counts  
Blind A  
$22 ($23)  
Command for  
DSSP block  
$20  
Fig. 4-11-(b). M-Track Move Timing Chart  
– 131 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-7. Digital CLV  
Fig. 4-12 shows the block diagram. Digital CLV outputs MDS error and MDP error signals with PWM, with the  
sampling frequency increased up to 130kHz during normal-speed playback in CLVS, CLVP and other modes.  
In addition, the digital spindle servo gain is variable.  
Digital CLV  
CLVS U/D  
MDS Error  
Measure  
MDP Error  
Measure  
Oversampling  
Filter-1  
2/1 MUX  
CLV P/S  
Gain  
MDS  
Gain  
MDP  
1/2  
Mux  
+
Gain  
DCLV  
CLV P/S  
Oversampling  
Filter-2  
Noise Shape  
Modulation  
KICK, BRAKE, STOP  
PWMI  
Mode Select  
LPWR  
MDP  
CLVS U/D: Up/down signal from CLVS servo  
MDS error: Frequency error for CLVP servo  
MDP error: Phase error for CLVP servo  
PWMI:  
Spindle drive signal from the microcomputer for CAV servo  
Fig. 4-12. Block Diagram  
– 132 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed  
In the CXD3048R, the following playback modes can be selected through different combinations of the XTAI,  
XTSL pins, double-speed command (DSPB), VCO1 selection command (VCOSEL1), VCO1 frequency division  
commands (KSL3, KSL2) and command transfer rate selector (ASHS) in CLV-N or CLV-W mode.  
1
2
Mode  
XTAI  
XTSL  
DSPB VCOSEL1  
ASHS Playback speed  
Error correction  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
768Fs  
768Fs  
768Fs  
768Fs  
384Fs  
384Fs  
384Fs  
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0/1  
0/1  
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1×  
2×  
2×  
4×  
1×  
2×  
1×  
C1: double; C2: quadruple  
C1: double; C2: double  
C1: double; C2: quadruple  
C1: double; C2: double  
C1: double; C2: quadruple  
C1: double; C2: double  
C1: double; C2: double  
1
0/1  
0/1  
0/1  
1
2
Actually, the optimal value should be used together with KSL3 and KSL2.  
When $8 command ERC4 = 1, C2 is quadruple correction even when DSPB = 1.  
The playback speed can be varied by setting VP0 to VP7 in CAV-W mode. See "[3] Description of Modes" for  
details.  
§4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits  
The CXD3048R inputs data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via the shock-proof memory controller  
block.  
The data from the shock-proof memory controller block is output externally as bass-boosted data via the DBB  
circuit.  
When not using the DAC block, the data from the shock-proof memory controller block can be output directly to  
the outside of the LSI.  
Also, when not using the shock-proof memory controller, the data can be input directly from the CD-DSP block  
to the DAC block.  
The DAC block output format supports 16, 18 or 20 bits.  
– 133 –  
§4-10. DAC Block Input Timing  
Fig. 4-13 shows the input timing chart to the DAC block.  
The CXD3048R can transfer data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via an external route. This allows the data to be sent to the DAC block via an  
audio DSP, etc.  
Normal-speed Playback  
LRCKI  
(44.1k)  
24  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
BCKI  
(2.12M)  
L14 L13  
L12 L11 L10  
L9  
L8  
L7  
L6  
L5  
L4  
L3  
L2  
L1  
L0  
Rch MSB  
R0  
Lch MSB (15)  
PCMDI  
Double-speed Playback  
LRCKI  
(88.2k)  
1
2
24  
BCKI  
(4.23M)  
PCMDI  
Lch MSB (15)  
Rch MSB  
R0  
L0  
Fig. 4-13. Input Timing to the DAC Block  
CXD3048R  
§4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions  
Zero Data Detection  
When the condition where the lower 4 bits of the input data are DC and the remaining upper bits are all "0"  
or all "1" has continued for about 300ms (16384/44.1kHz), zero data is detected. Zero data detection is  
performed independently for the left and right channels.  
Mute flag output  
The LRMU pin goes active when any one of the following conditions is met. (when $AA command ORMU = 0)  
The polarity can be selected by the $A5X command ZDPL.  
When zero data is detected  
When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin and the state continues for approximately 300ms  
When the $A5 command SMUT is set and the state continues for approximately 300ms  
Attenuation Operation  
Assuming the attenuation commands X1, X2 and X3, the corresponding audio outputs are Y1, Y2 and Y3  
(Y1 > Y3 > Y2). First, the command X1 is sent and then the audio output approaches Y1. When the  
command X2 is sent before the audio output reaches Y1 (A in the figure), the audio output passes Y1 and  
approaches Y2. And, when the command X3 is sent before the audio output reaches Y2 (B or C in the  
figure), the audio output approaches Y3 from the value (B or C in the figure) at that point.  
0dB  
400 (H)  
A
Y1  
B
Y3  
C
Y2  
∞  
000 (H)  
23.2 [ms]  
DAC Block Mute Operation  
Soft mute  
Soft mute results and the input data is attenuated to zero when any one of the following conditions is met.  
When attenuation data of 000 (h) is set  
When $A5 command SMUT is set to "1"  
When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin  
Soft mute off  
Soft mute on  
Soft mute off  
0dB  
dB  
23.2 [ms]  
23.2 [ms]  
– 135 –  
CXD3048R  
Zero detection mute  
Analog mute is applied to the respective channel when $AX command ZMUTA is set to "0" and zero data is  
detected for the left or right channel. (See "Zero data detection".)  
When $AX command ZMUTA is set to “0”, analog mute is applied even if the mute flag output condition is  
met.  
LRCK Synchronization  
Synchronization is performed at the first rising edge of the LRCK input when reset.  
After that, synchronization is lost when the LRCK input frequency changes, etc., so resynchronization must  
be performed.  
The LRCK input frequency changes when the master clock of the LSI is switched and the playback speed  
changes such as the following cases.  
When the XTSL pin switches between high and low  
When the $9 command DSPB setting changes  
When the $A4 command MCSL setting changes  
When operation switches between CLV mode and CAV mode  
For resynchronization, set the $A5 command XWOC to "1", wait for one LRCK cycle or more, and then set  
XWOC to "0".  
Digital High and Bass Boost  
High and bass boost without external parts is possible using the built-in digital filter.  
Perform the following operations when turning boost off or when lowering the current boost level.  
1. Set $A5X command BSTCL to "1".  
2. Wait 20ms or more, set the boost level or turn boost off, then set $A5X command BSTCL to "0".  
High-cut Filter  
This filter lowers the high-frequency level by approximately 8dB.  
The frequency response is shown in Fig. 4-14.  
0.00  
–2.00  
–4.00  
–6.00  
–8.00  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency [Hz]  
Fig. 4-14. High-Cut Filter Frequency Response  
– 136 –  
CXD3048R  
Compressor, Dynamic High and Bass Boost  
1. Frequency Response and I/O Characteristics  
Fig. 4-15 shows the frequency response for dynamic high boost and bass boost.  
This figure shows the frequency response for a high boost turnover frequency of 5kHz and a bass boost  
turnover frequency of 160Hz. The boost level and turnover frequency can be set independently for high  
boost and bass boost. In addition, all frequencies are lowered by approximately 2dB in order to prevent  
clipping, so the medium frequencies are –2dB output. The high boost and bass boost levels indicate the  
relative values from this level.  
Next, the compressor, high boost and bass boost I/O characteristics are shown in Fig. 4-17.  
As shown in this figure, the compressor characteristics span all frequencies. In addition, the high boost and  
bass boost characteristics are for when the input signal is sufficiently higher or lower than the turnover  
frequency.  
The boost levels can be set independently. Uth and Lth on the vertical axis are the gain control threshold  
values, and the desired output value can be taken from the area enclosed by the parallelograms near these  
levels. The Uth and Lth settings are described hereafter.  
20.00  
(1) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 0  
(4)  
18.00  
16.00  
(2) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 1  
(3) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 0  
(4) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 1  
(3)  
14.00  
12.00  
10.00  
8.00  
(2)  
(1)  
6.00  
4.00  
2.00  
0.00  
–2.00  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency response [Hz]  
Fig. 4-15. Digital Bass Boost Frequency Response  
– 137 –  
CXD3048R  
2. Settings  
When performing dynamic processing, the auditory volume and other characteristics change according to  
the boost levels and various other settings. The values that can be set by the serial commands and the  
resulting effects are described below.  
2-1. Boost Level  
The boost level can be set independently for the compressor, high boost and bass boost. Boost level here  
refers to the maximum boost level when a low level signal is input. The boost level changes over time when  
a high level signal is input in order to prevent clipping.  
2-2. Gain Control Thresholds  
The gain control thresholds are Uth and Lth. When the level exceeds Uth, the gain is reduced; when the  
level falls below Lth, the gain is increased. If both Uth and Lth are set to large values, the volume increases  
and the respective boost effects are emphasized. On the other hand, some sources may be clipped due to  
the balance with the boost level. These values can be set independently for the compressor and high/bass  
boost. The same values are shared for high and bass boost.  
2-3. Attack Time, Release Time  
The attack time represents the speed at which the gain is reduced after high level input, and the release  
time represents the speed at which the gain is increased when the input level suddenly becomes smaller. If  
these values are set to "fast", the boost effects increase. Like the gain control thresholds, these values can  
be set independently for the compressor and high/bass boost.  
2-4. Envelope Detection Release Time  
This sets the output signal envelope coefficient used for gain control. When set to "fast", the boost effects  
increase. This setting is shared by compressor and high/bass boost.  
Attack time  
Standard  
Slow  
Release time  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Standard  
Lch  
High boost  
Bass boost  
+10dB  
Uch  
–12dB  
–12dB  
–12dB  
–12dB  
–1.9dB  
–1.9dB  
–1.9dB  
–1.9dB  
+14dB  
Slow  
+18dB  
Slow  
+22dB  
Table 4-16. Recommended Dynamic Bass and High Boost Settings  
– 138 –  
CXD3048R  
Input [dB]  
0
Uth  
Lth  
Fig. 4-17. Dynamic Processing I/O Characteristics  
Lth [dB]  
–23  
Uth [dB]  
–8.0  
Boost level [dB]  
6
Compressor  
High boost  
Bass boost  
–12/–4.4  
–12/–4.4  
–1.9/–0.9  
–1.9/–0.9  
4/6/8/10  
10/14/18/22  
– 139 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-12. LPF Block  
The CXD3048R contains a secondary active LPF.  
The LPF block application circuit is shown in Fig. 4-18.  
100Ω  
AOUT1 (2)  
Analog out  
2200pF  
VREFL (R)  
1µF  
Fig. 4-18. LPF External Circuit  
– 140 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions  
§4-13-1. DRAM I/F  
A 4M DRAM or 16M DRAM can be selected as the external buffer RAM. The 16M DRAM supports either row  
address 212 and column address 210 or row address 211 and column address 211.  
Refresh is performed by data access, and the refresh cycle is approximately 11.6ms when 4M DRAM is  
selected, or approximately 46.4ms (210 × 212) or 23.2ms (211 × 211) when 16M DRAM is selected.  
In addition, XRAS-only-refresh is executed 14 times in order to initialize the RAM after the power is turned on  
and the DRAM, which is to be used by the $A4X commands RSL1 and RSL0, is selected. Data access to the  
DRAM is not possible during this period.  
XRST  
XRAS  
Approximately 5.67µs  
14 times  
§4-13-2. Switching from Data Through Mode to Shock-proof  
The CXD3048R performs refresh by data access.  
When switching from (1) Shock-proof mode to (2) data through mode to (3) Shock-proof mode, be sure to  
reset all of WA, VWA and RA before performing data access for (3).  
– 141 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-13-3. CPU Serial Data Output (when $A7X STASEL = 1)  
Data is read out by setting the XSOEO command low and inputting SQCK. The data contents at the falling  
edge of the XSOEO command are output from the SQSO pin at the falling edge of SCK.  
XSOEO  
SQCK  
Invalid  
SQSO  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
D10  
D11  
D0: XWPHD  
D1: QRCVD  
Data write to DRAM prohibited signal (low for XFUL + ROF + WRNG)  
Indicates whether XQOK was registered as a defined address after it was sent.  
(High = registration OK)  
D2: XEMP  
D3: AM15  
D4: AM16  
D5: AM17  
D6: AM18  
D7: AM19  
D8: AM20  
D9: AM21  
D10: XFUL  
D11: ROF  
Low when the DRAM is empty of valid data. (VWA = RA)  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.  
Low when the DRAM is full and there is no write area.  
High when the DSP RAM has overflowed.  
Note) When GRSCOR is low, QRCVD is high when data write to the DRAM is enabled, even if a negative  
pulse is input to XQOK.  
– 142 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-13-4. Data Linking  
In order to restart write after PCM data write to the DRAM has been interrupted due to sound skipping or other  
factors, continuity must be maintained between the data written last and the subsequent data to be written.  
Conventional systems fix an aim at the data linking point, compare the preceding DRAM reference data with  
the data read from the disc, and then link the data when matching data is detected. However, when using  
music software where a fixed pattern is repeated, this system may link the data at an incorrect point. In  
addition, if pre-value hold or interpolation is performed at the point to be linked, data linking may not be  
possible at all. In order to eliminate these data linking errors, the CXD3048R generates a crystal accuracy  
SCOR (= GRSCOR) synchronized to the PCM data to allow data linking along the time axis, thus greatly  
increasing the data linking accuracy.  
§4-13-5. Data Processing  
The CXD3048R accumulates PCM data from the CD-DSP block in an external buffer and then inputs the data  
to the DAC block in sync with the internally generated Fs system clock. At this time, the PCM data is loaded  
and read out at the same rate during normal playback, so data does not accumulate in the buffer RAM.  
Therefore, the loading rate must be increased. This is accomplished by setting the CD-DSP block to double-  
speed mode and doubling the loading rate until the RAM is full. When the RAM becomes full, data regeneration  
from the disc stops temporarily and the RAM data is read out to create an empty area, at which point loading  
is restarted. These operations are then repeated to effectively use the entire area inside the RAM.  
Shock-proof  
4M DRAM  
CD-DSP  
DAC  
PCM Data Flow (Example for 4M × 1 mode)  
§4-13-6. System Outline (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)  
The addresses for accessing the buffer RAM data consist of a readout address (RA) and a write address (WA).  
The data to be written is not always correct, and the subcodes, etc. must be constantly checked to make sure  
the data is correct and there is no sound skipping. The CXD3048R checks subcode-Q using the CPU, and  
defines the data by inputting a negative pulse to the XQOK pin. This defined address (VWA) is loaded to the  
internal register and the data between VWA and RA is treated as valid data. WA advances at a speed twice  
that of RA, and RA is written by WA and read out sequentially in the order registered by VWA. When RA  
catches up to VWA, there is no more valid data and readout is prohibited (XEMP = low). In addition, when WA  
catches up to RA, the buffer is full and write is prohibited (XWIH = low). In this manner, write to the RAM is  
interrupted when the RAM becomes full and there is no write area or when sound skipping caused by  
scratches, external disturbances or other factors is detected. Data  
WA  
continuity must be ensured in order to restart write. Therefore, the  
VWA  
CXD3048R returns to the last defined address, and the CPU accesses  
the defined address point it sent last (actually the data slightly before that  
point) and reads the subcode-Q after the rising edge of SCOR. If the  
subcode-Q matches the last defined address, XWRE is made to fall and  
write is restarted when GRSCOR comes high within 7ms.  
Note 1) If XWRE is made to fall when GRSCOR is low, XWIH goes  
low and the write prohibited state results.  
RA  
Valid data  
Note 2) When GRSCOR is low, VWA is not updated even if a  
negative pulse is input to XQOK. Therefore, set XQOK high  
while GRSCOR is low.  
– 143 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-13-7. Data Write (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)  
The PCM data input from the DSP is loaded according to the Fs system clock inputs (BCKI, WDCI and LRCI),  
and is written sequentially to the external DRAM according to WA when the XWRE pin input goes low and  
internal write is enabled (XWIH pin output = high).  
The written data must be checked by some means or other. The CXD3048R assumes data checking with  
subcode-Q. In this case, the CPU reads subcode-Q triggered by the SCOR signal output from the DSP to  
determine whether sound skipping occurred. If sound skipping is not detected, the CPU inputs a negative  
pulse to the XQOK pin during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the data written to WA  
thus far is registered to VWA as data without sound skipping.  
SCOR  
No sound skipping = CRC OK  
No sound skipping = CRC NG  
SUBQ  
GRSCOR  
XQOK  
WA VWA  
Write prohibition is determined by the internal status or by an external command. When prohibited by the  
internal status, the XWIH pin goes low, and this status is established when any one of the following conditions  
is met.  
1. There is no empty area in the DRAM.  
2. The DSP RAM has overflowed.  
XFUL = low  
ROF = high  
3. XWRE was made to fall when GRSCOR is low.  
4. The DRAM write speed exceeds the set value.  
WRNG = high  
SPOVER = high  
(when $A7 command XWIH1 = 1)  
5. Access to DRAM in the shock-proof memory controller block failed. NOWR = high  
(when $A7 command XWIH2 = 1)  
monC2PO = high  
6. The number of C2PO errors exceeds the set value.  
7. Write is prohibited by the external input (A11 pin).  
($AE command WTC C2PO = 1)  
(when $A7 command A11 SEL = 1  
and $AE command WTC C2PO = 1)  
When the XWIH pin goes low due to the above conditions, the CPU must set the XWRE pin high and then the  
XWIH pin high.  
After the CPU sends XQOK, it must check whether XQOK was registered as a defined address. This is  
because if the above conditions arise at the same time XQOK is sent, XQOK becomes invalid and the  
addresses defined by the CPU and the CXD3048R may not match. Therefore, the XWIH pin output is used as  
the XQOK recognition signal (QRCVD) while XQOK is low. When QRCVD is high, this indicates that XQOK  
was correctly registered as a defined address (VWA was updated). When QRCVD is low, this indicates one of  
the following conditions.  
1. Write is prohibited due to the above conditions.  
2. XWRE is high.  
Regarding condition 2, if XQOK is sent while the XWRE pin is high, WA, VWA and RA are all reset (when  
GRSCOR is high).  
– 144 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-13-8. Data Readout (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)  
When data write starts, there is no valid data in the RAM so the XEMP pin is low. The XWRE pin goes from  
high to low, and if there is no sound skipping or other problems with the CRC check at the next SCOR, XQOK  
is sent during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the defined address and valid data are  
registered. At this point, the XEMP pin goes high for the first time and readout is enabled. Data readout follows  
RA, and is performed in sync with the internally generated Fs system clocks. The readout data and the Fs  
system clocks are output from the DATA and the BCK and LRCK pins, respectively.  
RA is the address for reading out the written data that has been validated by VWA, and the area from VWA to  
RA is the amount of valid data (|VWA – RA|). The upper 5 bits are output as AM21 to AM17. When RA catches  
up to VWA and there is no more valid data (|VWA – RA| = 0), the XEMP pin goes low and readout is prohibited.  
When this state occurs, the CPU must set the XRDE pin high to prohibit readout. To restart readout, valid data  
must be registered as described above. The XEMP pin is held low until valid data is registered.  
XWRE  
XQOK  
XEMP  
XRDE  
Note) After the XWRE pin goes from high to low, readout is enabled when valid data is registered by  
the first XQOK. However, ensuring some difference between VWA and RA is recommended in  
consideration of CRC NG, etc.  
See also "Application Notes" for the control of the shock-proof memory controller block.  
– 145 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function  
The CXD3048R can establish a special area in the DRAM. This allows a microcomputer to read and write  
optional 16-bit data to a portion of the DRAM area.  
This function can be used to store and optionally read out demodulated CD TEXT data, etc.  
The range of this special area is set by $A7, and can be selected in 8 steps from 32K to 2M bits.  
Table 4-19 shows the addresses which can be specified according to the used DRAM capacity and the special  
area setting value.  
In addition, the address specification method can be selected from absolute and relative specification.  
RSL  
1 0  
MSL  
2 1 0  
DRDR19 to DRDR0  
specification range  
0 0 0  
0 0 1  
0 1 0  
0 1 1  
1 0 0  
1 0 1  
1 1 0  
1 1 1  
— — — — — — —  
00000 to 007FF  
00000 to 00FFF  
00000 to 01FFF  
00000 to 03FFF  
00000 to 07FFF  
00000 to 0FFFF  
00000 to 1FFFF  
4M setting  
0 0  
0 0 0  
0 0 1  
0 1 0  
0 1 1  
1 0 0  
1 0 1  
1 1 0  
1 1 1  
— — — — — — —  
00000 to 007FF  
00000 to 00FFF  
00000 to 01FFF  
00000 to 03FFF  
00000 to 07FFF  
00000 to 0FFFF  
00000 to 1FFFF  
16M setting 1 1  
Table 4-19.  
– 146 –  
CXD3048R  
Write and Read by Absolute Address Specification  
WRITE  
READ  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "1"  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "1"  
Transfer an optical address  
with the $A9F command  
Transfer an optional address  
with the $A9F command  
L (Req NG)  
L (Req NG)  
Check SQSO  
(A)  
Check SQSO  
(1)  
H (Req OK)  
H (Req OK)  
Write optional data with the  
$A9E command  
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 1)  
Generate a readout request  
with $A9E command  
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 1)  
(B)  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "0"  
Change $A8 command  
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"  
L (NG)  
END  
Check SQSO  
(2)  
H (Data Ready)  
Read 16-bit data from SQSO  
and SQCK  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "0"  
END  
– 147 –  
CXD3048R  
Write Communication Timing  
$A8  
$A9F $A9E $A8  
Command  
XSOEO2  
STDO OUT  
SQSO  
Readout Communication Timing  
$A8  
$A9F $A9E $A8  
Command  
XSOEO2  
$A8  
STDO OUT  
SQCK  
(1)  
(2)  
SQSO  
D0  
D15  
Readout Communication Operation  
(1) Set STDO OUT to "1" to switch the serial communication line for special memory.  
(2) Send the address command ($A9F), then check whether the DRAM related processing has completed  
using the SQSO pin.  
(3) The data read out from the DRAM is loaded to the communication block inside the LSI by sending the read  
command ($A9E) and causing XSOEO2 to fall ($A8). However, the DRAM related processing requires a  
check as to whether the data was loaded properly using the SQSO pin.  
(4) The readout data is output from the SQSO pin by inputting 16 clocks from the SQCK pin.  
– 148 –  
CXD3048R  
Write and Read by Relative Address Specification  
READ  
WRITE  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "1"  
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "1"  
Write the absolute address  
(A) on page 147  
Write the absolute address  
(B) on page 147  
NEXT  
PENDING  
NEXT  
PENDING  
Write optional data with the  
$A9E command  
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 0)  
Generate a readout request  
with $A9E command  
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 0)  
L (Req NG)  
L (Req NG)  
Check SQSO  
H (Req OK)  
Check SQSO  
H (Req OK)  
N
Change $A8 command  
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"  
and set SDTO OUT to "1"  
END  
Y
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "0"  
L (NG)  
Check SQSO  
H (Data Ready)  
Read 16-bit data from SQSO  
and SQCK  
END  
N
END  
Y
Set $A8 commands  
XSOEO2 to "1" and  
SDTO OUT to "0"  
END  
– 149 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-15. Asymmetry Correction  
Fig. 4-20 shows the block diagram and circuit example.  
ASYE command  
R1  
ASYO  
RFAC  
+
R1  
R1  
R1  
R2  
ASYI  
+
BIAS  
R1  
2
5
=
R2  
Fig. 4-20. Asymmetry Correction Application Circuit  
– 150 –  
CXD3048R  
§4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation  
In order to demodulate the CD TEXT data, set the command $8 Data 6 D3 TXON to "1". While TXON is "1",  
the CD TEXT demodulation circuit occupies the EXCK and SBSO pins, so connect EXCK to low and do not  
use the data output from SBSO. Also, 26.7ms (max.) are required to demodulate the CD TEXT data correctly  
after TXON is set to "1".  
The CD TEXT data is output by switching the SQSO pin with the command. The CD TEXT data output is  
enabled by setting the command $8 Data 6 D2 TXOUT to "1". To read data, the readout clock should be input  
to SQCK.  
The readable data are the CRC counting results for each pack and the CD TEXT data (16 bytes) except for  
CRC data.  
When the CD TEXT data is read, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,  
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.  
Data which can be stored in the LSI is 1 packet (4 packs).  
TXON  
CD TEXT  
Decoder  
EXCK  
SBSO  
Subcode  
Decoder  
SQCK  
SQSO  
TXOUT  
Fig. 4-21. Block Diagram of CD TEXT Demodulation Circuit  
– 151 –  
SCOR  
SQSO  
SQCK  
16 Bytes  
Pack4  
4 bits  
CRC  
4 bits  
0
16 Bytes  
Pack1  
16 Bytes  
Pack2  
16 Bytes  
Pack3  
Subcode Q Data  
80 Clocks  
CRCF  
CRCF  
520 Clocks  
TXOUT  
(command)  
CRC Data  
ID1 (Pack1)  
ID2 (Pack1)  
ID3 (Pack1)  
LSB  
MSB LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
CRC CRC CRC CRC  
0
0
0
0
S2 R2 W1 V1 U1 T1 S1 R1 U3 T3 S3 R3 W2 V2 U2 T2 W4 V4 U4 T4 S4  
SQSO  
SQCK  
4
3
2
1
TXOUT  
(command)  
Fig. 4-22. CD TEXT Data Timing Chart  
CXD3048R  
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands  
§5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System (VDD: Supply voltage)  
Focus servo  
Sampling rate:  
Input range:  
Output format:  
Other:  
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)  
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD  
7-bit PWM  
Offset cancel  
Focus bias adjustment  
Focus search  
Gain-down  
Defect countermeasure  
Auto gain control  
Tracking servo  
Sampling rate:  
Input range:  
Output format:  
Other:  
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)  
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD  
7-bit PWM  
Offset cancel  
E:F balance adjustment  
Track jump  
Gain-up  
Defect countermeasure  
Drive cancel  
Auto gain control  
Vibration countermeasure  
Sled servo  
Sampling rate:  
Input range:  
Output format:  
Other:  
345Hz (when MCK = 128Fs)  
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD  
7-bit PWM  
Sled move  
FOK, MIRR, DFCT signal generation  
RF signal sampling rate: 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs)  
Input range:  
Other:  
1/4VDD to 3/4VDD  
RF zero level automatic measurement  
– 153 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK)  
The clock with 2/3 frequency of the crystal is supplied to the digital servo block.  
XT4D and XT2D are $3F commands, and XT1D is a $3E command. (Default is "0" for each command)  
The digital servo block is designed with an MCK frequency of 5.6448MHz (128Fs) as typical.  
Mode  
XTAI  
FSTO  
256Fs  
256Fs  
256Fs  
512Fs  
512Fs  
512Fs  
512Fs  
XTSL  
0
XT4D  
0
XT2D  
XT1D  
Frequency division ratio  
MCK  
256Fs  
128Fs  
128Fs  
512Fs  
256Fs  
128Fs  
128Fs  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
384Fs  
384Fs  
384Fs  
768Fs  
768Fs  
768Fs  
768Fs  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1/2  
1/2  
1
0
1
1
1
1/2  
1/4  
1/4  
0
0
0
Fs = 44.1kHz, —: don't care  
Table 5-1.  
– 154 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG (Average) Measurement and Compensation] (See Fig. 5-3.)  
The CXD3048R can measure the averages of RFDC, VC, FE and TE and compensate these signals using the  
measurement results to control the servo effectively. This AVRG measurement and compensation is necessary  
to initialize the CXD3048R, and is able to cancel the DC offset.  
AVRG measurement takes the levels applied to the VC, FE, RFDC and TE pins as the digital average values of  
256 samples, and then loads these values into each AVRG register.  
The AVRG measurement commands are D15 (VCLM), D13 (FLM), D11 (RFLM) and D4 (TCLM) of $38.  
Measurement is on when the respective command is set to "1".  
AVRG measurement requires approximately 2.9ms to 5.8ms (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is  
received.  
The completion of AVRG measurement operation can be monitored by the SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-2.)  
Monitoring requires that the upper 8 bits of the command register are 38 (h).  
XLAT  
2.9 to 5.8ms  
SENS  
(= XAVEBSY)  
Max. 1µs  
AVRG measurement completed  
Timing Chart 5-2.  
<Measurement>  
VC AVRG: The VC DC offset (VC AVRG) which is the center voltage for the system is measured and used to  
compensate the FE, TE and SE signals.  
FE AVRG: The FE DC offset (FE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the FE and FZC signals.  
TE AVRG: The TE DC offset (TE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the TE and SE signals.  
RF AVRG: The RF DC offset (RF AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the RFDC signal.  
<Compensation>  
RFLC:  
(RF signal Ð RF AVRG) is input to the RF In register.  
"00" is input when the RF signal is lower than RF AVRG.  
(TE signal Ð VC AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.  
(TE signal Ð TE AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.  
(FE signal Ð VC AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.  
(FE signal Ð FE AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.  
(FE signal Ð FE AVRG) is input to the FZC register.  
TCL0:  
TCL1:  
VCLC:  
FLC1:  
FLC0:  
Two methods of canceling the DC offset are assumed for the CXD3048R. These methods are shown in Figs. 5-  
3a and 5-3b.  
An example of AVRG measurement and compensation commands is shown below.  
$38 08 00 (RF AVRG measurement)  
$38 20 00 (FE AVRG measurement)  
$38 00 10 (TE AVRG measurement)  
$38 14 0A (Compensation on [RFLC, FLC0, FLC1, TLC1]; corresponds to Fig. 5-3a.)  
See the description of $38 for these commands.  
– 155 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function (See Fig. 5-3.)  
When the disc is rotated with the laser on, and with the FCS (focus) servo on via FCS search, the traverse  
waveform appears in the TE signal due to disc eccentricity.  
In this condition, the low-frequency component can be extracted from the TE signal using the built-in TRK hold  
filter by setting D5 (TBLM) of $38 to "1".  
The extracted low-frequency component is loaded into the TRVSC register as a digital value, and the TRVSC  
register value is established when TBLM returns to "0".  
Next, setting D2 (TLC2) of $38 to "1" compensates the values obtained from the TE and SE input pins with the  
TRVSC register value (subtraction), allowing the E:F balance offset to be adjusted. (See Fig. 5-3.)  
§5-5. FCS Bias (Focus Bias) Adjustment Function  
The FBIAS register value can be added to the FCS servo filter input by setting D14 (FBON) of $3A to "1". (See  
Fig. 5-3.)  
When D11 = 0 and D10 = 1 is set by $34F, the FBIAS register value can be written using the 9-bit value of D9  
to D1 (D9: MSB).  
In addition, the RF jitter can be monitored by setting the $8 command SOCT to "1". (See "DSP Block Timing  
Chart".)  
The FBIAS register can be used as a counter by setting D13 (FBSS) of $3A to "1". The FBIAS register functions  
as an up counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 1, and as a down counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 0.  
The number of up and down steps can be changed by setting D11 and D10 (FBV1 and FBV0) of $3A.  
When using the FBIAS register as a counter, the counter stops when the value set beforehand in FBL9 to  
FBL1 of $34 matches the FCSBIAS value. Also, if the upper 8 bits of the command register are $3A at this  
time, SENS goes high and the counter stop can be monitored.  
Here, assume the FBIAS setting value FB9  
A
B
C
to FB1 and the FBIAS LIMIT value FBL9 to  
FBL1 are set in status A. For example, if  
command registers FBUP = 0, FBV1 = 0,  
FBV0 = 0 and FBSS = 1 are set from this  
status, down count starts from status A and  
approaches the set LIMIT value. When the  
LIMIT value is reached and the FBIAS value  
matches FBL9 to FBL1, the counter stops  
and the SENS pin goes high. Note that the  
up/down counter counts at each sampling  
cycle of the focus servo filter. The number of  
steps by which the count value changes can  
be selected from 1, 2, 4 or 8 steps by FBV1  
and FBV0. When converted to FE input, 1  
step corresponds to 1/512 × VDD/2.  
FBIAS setting value (FB9 to FB1)  
LIMIT value (FBL9 to FBL1)  
SENS value  
A: Register mode  
B: Counter mode  
C: Counter mode (when stopped)  
– 156 –  
CXD3048R  
RFDC from A/D  
to RF In register  
RF AVRG  
register  
RFLC  
SE from A/D  
TE from A/D  
to SLD In register  
to TRK In register  
TLC1 · TLD1  
TLC2 · TLD2  
TE AVRG  
register  
TRVSC  
register  
TLC1  
TLC2  
FE from A/D  
to FCS In register  
+
FE AVRG  
register  
FBIAS  
register  
FLC1  
FLC0  
FBON  
to FZC register  
Fig. 5-3a.  
RFDC from A/D  
to RF In register  
RF AVRG  
register  
RFLC  
SE from A/D  
TE from A/D  
to SLD In register  
to TRK In register  
TLC0 · TLD0  
TLC2 · TLD2  
TLC0  
VC AVRG  
register  
TRVSC  
register  
TLC2  
VCLC  
FE from A/D  
to FCS In register  
+
FE AVRG  
register  
FBIAS  
register  
FLC0  
FBON  
to FZC register  
Fig. 5-3b.  
– 157 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-6. AGCNTL (Automatic Gain Control) Function  
The AGCNTL function automatically adjusts the filter internal gain in order to obtain the appropriate servo loop  
gain. AGCNTL not only copes with the sensitivity variation of the actuator and photo diode, etc., but also  
obtains the optimal gain for each disc.  
The AGCNTL command is sent when each servo is turned on. During AGCNTL operation, if the upper 8 bits of  
the command register are 38 (h), the completion of AGCNTL operation can be confirmed by monitoring the  
SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-4 and "Description of SENS Signals".)  
Setting D9 and D8 of $38 to "1" sets FCS (focus) and TRK (tracking) respectively to AGCNTL operation.  
Note) During AGCNTL operation, each servo filter gain must be normal, and the anti-shock circuit (described  
hereafter) must be disabled.  
XLAT  
Max. 11.4µs  
SENS  
(= AGOK)  
AGCNTL completion  
Timing Chart 5-4.  
Coefficient K13 changes for AGF (focus AGCNTL) and coefficients K23 and K07 change for AGT (tracking  
AGCNTL) due to AGCNTL.  
These coefficients change from 01 to 7F (h), and they must also be set within this range when written  
externally.  
After AGCNTL operation has completed, these coefficient values can be confirmed by reading them out from  
the SENS pin with the serial readout function (described hereafter).  
AGCNTL related settings  
The following settings can be changed with $35, $36 and $37.  
FG6 to FG0; AGF convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)  
TG6 to TG0; AGT convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)  
AGS;  
Self-stop on/off  
AGJ;  
Convergence completion judgment time  
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGF)  
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGT)  
AGCNTL sensitivity 1 (during rough adjustment)  
AGCNTL sensitivity 2 (during fine adjustment)  
Rough adjustment on/off  
AGGF;  
AGGT;  
AGV1;  
AGV2;  
AGHS;  
AGHT;  
Fine adjustment time  
Note) Converging servo loop gain values can be changed with the FG6 to FG0 and TG6 to TG0 setting  
values. In addition, these setting values must be within the effective setting range. The default settings  
aim for 0dB at 1kHz. However, since convergence values vary according to the characteristics of each  
constituent element of the servo loop, FG and TG values should be set as necessary.  
– 158 –  
CXD3048R  
AGCNTL default operation has two stages.  
In the first stage, rough adjustment is performed with high sensitivity for a certain period of time (select  
256/128ms with AGHT, when MCK = 128Fs), and the AGCNTL coefficient approaches the appropriate value.  
The sensitivity at this time can be selected from two types with AGV1.  
In the second stage, the AGCNTL coefficient is finely adjusted with relatively low sensitivity to further approach  
the appropriate value. The sensitivity for the second stage can be selected from two types with AGV2. In the  
second stage of default operation, when the AGCNTL coefficient reaches the appropriate value and stops  
changing, the CXD3048R confirms that the AGCNTL coefficient has not changed for a certain period of time  
(select 63/31ms with AGHJ, when MCK = 128Fs), and then completes AGCNTL operation. (Self-stop mode)  
This self-stop mode can be canceled by setting AGS to "0".  
In addition, the first stage is omitted for AGCNTL operation when AGHS is set to "0".  
An example of AGCNTL coefficient transitions during AGCNTL operation with various settings is shown in  
Fig. 5-5.  
Initial value  
Slope AGV1  
AGCNTL coefficient value  
Slope AGV2  
Convergence value  
AGHT  
AGJ  
AGCNTL  
Start  
AGCNTL  
completion  
SENS  
Fig. 5-5.  
Note) Fig. 5-5 shows the case where the AGCCNTL coefficient converges from the initial value to a smaller  
value.  
– 159 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search (Focus Search)  
The FCS servo is controlled by the 8-bit serial command $0X. (See Table 5-6.)  
Register  
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16  
name  
1 0 — — FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN NORMAL)  
1 1 — — FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN DOWN)  
0 — 0 — FOCUS SERVO OFF, 0V OUT  
FOCUS  
CONTROL  
0
0 0 0 0  
0 — 0 — FOCUS SERVO OFF, FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE OUT  
0 — 0 0 FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE DOWN  
0 — 0 0 FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE UP  
—: don't care  
Table 5-6.  
FCS Search  
FCS search is required in the course of turning on the FCS servo.  
Fig. 5-7 shows the signals for sending commands $00 $02 $03 and performing only FCS search operation.  
Fig. 5-8 shows the signals for sending $08 (FCS on) after that.  
$00 $02 $03  
$00 $02 $03  
$08  
0
FCSDRV  
FCSDRV  
RF  
RF  
FOK  
FOK  
FZC comparator level  
FE  
FE  
0
0
FZC  
FZC  
Fig. 5-7.  
Fig. 5-8.  
– 160 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-8. TRK (Tracking) and SLD (Sled) Servo Control  
The TRK and SLD servos are controlled by the 8-bit command $2X. (See Table 5-9.)  
When the upper 4 bits of the serial data are 2 (h), TZC is output to the SENS pin.  
Register  
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16  
name  
0 0 — — TRACKING SERVO OFF  
0 1 — — TRACKING SERVO ON  
1 0 — — FORWARD TRACK JUMP  
1 1 — — REVERSE TRACK JUMP  
— — 0 0 SLED SERVO OFF  
— — 0 1 SLED SERVO ON  
TRACKING  
MODE  
2
0 0 1 0  
— — 1 0 FORWARD SLED MOVE  
— — 1 1 REVERSE SLED MOVE  
—: don't care  
Table 5-9.  
TRK Servo  
The TRK JUMP (track jump) level can be set with 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $36.  
In addition, when the TRK servo is on and D17 of $1 is set to "1", the TRK servo filter switches to gain-up  
mode. The filter also switches to gain-up mode when the LOCK signal goes low or when vibration is detected  
with the anti-shock circuit (described hereafter) enabled.  
The CXD3048R has 2 types of gain-up filter structures in TRK gain-up mode which can be selected by setting  
D16 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)  
SLD Servo  
The SLD MOV (sled move) output, composed of a basic value from 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $37, is determined by  
multiplying this value by 1×, 2×, 3×, or 4× set using D17 and D16 when D18 = D19 = 0 is set with $3. (See  
Table 5-10.)  
SLD MOV must be performed continuously for 50µs or more. In addition, if the LOCK input signal goes low  
when the SLD servo is on, the SLD servo turns off.  
Note) When the LOCK signal is low, the TRK servo switches to gain-up mode and the SLD servo is turned  
off. These operations are disabled by setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1".  
Register  
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16  
name  
0 0 0 0 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±1)  
0 0 0 1 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±2)  
3
SELECT  
0 0 1 1  
0 0 1 0 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±3)  
0 0 1 1 SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value × ±4)  
Table 5-10.  
– 161 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation  
The RF signal obtained from the RFDC pin is sampled at approximately 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs) and  
loaded. The MIRR and DFCT signals are generated from this RF signal.  
MIRR Signal Generation  
The loaded RF signal is applied to peak hold and bottom hold circuits.  
An envelope is generated from the waveforms generated in these circuits, and the MIRR comparator level is  
generated from the average of this envelope waveform.  
The MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform generated by subtracting the bottom hold value  
from the peak hold value with this MIRR comparator level. (See Fig. 5-11.)  
The bottom hold speed and mirror sensitivity can be selected from four values using D7 and D6, and D5 and  
D4, respectively, of $3C.  
RF  
Peak Hold  
Bottom Hold  
Peak Hold  
MIRR Comp  
– Bottom Hold  
(Mirror comparator level)  
H
L
MIRR  
Fig. 5-11.  
DFCT Signal Generation  
The loaded RF signal is input to two peak hold circuits with different time constants, and the DFCT signal is  
generated by comparing the difference between these two peak hold waveforms with the DFCT comparator  
level. (See Fig. 5-12.)  
The DFCT comparator level can be selected from four values using D13 and D12 of $3B.  
RF  
Peak Hold1  
Peak Hold2  
Peak Hold2  
SDF  
– Peak Hold1  
(Defect comparator level)  
H
L
DFCT  
Fig. 5-12.  
– 162 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit  
The DFCT countermeasure circuit maintains the directionality of the servo so that the servo does not become  
easily dislocated due to scratches or defects on discs.  
Specifically, this operation is achieved by detecting scratches and defects with the DFCT signal generation  
circuit, and when DFCT goes high, applying the low-frequency component of the error signal before DFCT  
went high to the FCS and TRK servo filter inputs. (See Fig. 5-13.)  
In addition, these operations are activated by the default. They can be disabled by setting D7 (DFSW) of $38 to "1".  
Hold filter  
Error signal  
Input register  
Hold register EN  
DFCT  
Servo filter  
Fig. 5-13.  
§5-11. Anti-shock Circuit  
When vibrations occur in the CD player, this circuit forces the TRK filter to switch to gain-up mode so that the  
servo does not become easily dislocated. This circuit is for systems which require vibration countermeasures.  
Concretely, vibrations are detected using an internal anti-shock filter and comparator circuit, and the gain is  
increased. (See Fig. 5-14.)  
The comparator level is fixed to 1/16 of the maximum comparator input amplitude. However, the comparator  
level is practically variable by adjusting the value of the anti-shock filter output coefficient K35.  
This function can be turned on and off by D19 of $1 when the brake circuit (described hereafter) is off. (See  
Table 5-17.)  
This circuit can also support an external vibration detection circuit, and can set the TRK servo filter to gain-up  
mode by inputting high level to the ATSK pin.  
When the upper 4 bits of the command register are 1 (h), vibration detection can be monitored from the SENS  
pin. It can also be monitored from the ATSK pin by setting $3F command ASOT to "1".  
ATSK  
Anti-shock  
filter  
SENS  
Comparator  
TE  
TRK gain-up  
filter  
TRK  
PWM Gen.  
TRK gain normal  
filter  
Fig. 5-14.  
– 163 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-12. Brake Circuit  
Immediately after a long distance track jump it tends to be hard for the actuator to settle and for the servo to  
turn on.  
The brake circuit prevents these phenomenon.  
In principle, the brake circuit uses the tracking drive as a brake by cutting the unnecessary portions utilizing  
the 180° offset in the RF envelope and tracking error phase relationship which occurs when the actuator  
traverses the track in the radial direction from the inner track to the outer track and vice versa. (See Figs. 5-15  
and 5-16.)  
Concretely, this operation is achieved by masking the tracking drive using the TRKCNCL signal generated by  
loading the MIRR signal at the edge of the TZC (Tracking Zero Cross) signal.  
The brake circuit can be turned on and off by D18 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)  
In addition, the low frequency for the tracking drive after masking can be boosted. (SFBK1 and SFBK2 of  
$34B)  
Outer track Inner track  
Inner track Outer track  
REV FWD  
JMP JMP  
FWD REV  
JMP JMP  
Servo ON  
Servo ON  
TRK  
DRV  
TRK  
DRV  
RF  
Trace  
RF  
Trace  
MIRR  
MIRR  
TE  
0
TE  
0
TZC  
Edge  
TZC  
Edge  
TRKCNCL  
TRKCNCL  
TRK DRV  
0
0
(SFBK OFF)  
TRK DRV  
0
0
(SFBK OFF)  
TRK DRV  
(SFBK ON)  
TRK DRV  
(SFBK ON)  
SENS  
TZC out  
SENS  
TZC out  
Fig. 5-15.  
Fig. 5-16.  
Register  
name  
Command D23 to D20 D19 to D16  
1 0 — — ANTI SHOCK ON  
0  ANTI SHOCK OFF  
— 1 — — BRAKE ON  
— 0 — — BRAKE OFF  
TRACKING  
CONTROL  
1
0 0 0 1  
— — 0 — TRACKING GAIN NORMAL  
— — 1 — TRACKING GAIN UP  
 1 TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 1  
 0 TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 2  
—: don't care  
Fig. 5-17.  
– 164 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-13. COUT Signal  
The COUT signal is output to count the number of tracks during traverse, etc. It is basically generated by  
loading the MIRR signal at both edges of the TZC signal. The used TZC signal can be selected from among  
three different phases according to the COUT signal application.  
HPTZC: For 1-track jumps  
Fast phase COUT signal generation with a fast phase TZC signal. (The TZC phase is advanced by  
a cut-off 1kHz digital HPF; when MCK = 128Fs.)  
STZC: For COUT generation when MIRR is externally input and for applications other than COUT  
generation.  
This is generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)  
DTZC: For high-speed traverse  
Reliable COUT signal generation with a delayed phase STZC signal.  
Since it takes some time to generate the MIRR signal, it is necessary to delay the TZC signal in accordance  
with the MIRR signal delay during high-speed traverse.  
The COUT signal output method is switched with D15 and D14 of $3C.  
When D15 = 1:  
STZC  
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 0: HPTZC  
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 1: DTZC  
When DTZC is selected, the delay can be selected from two values with D14 of $36.  
§5-14. Serial Readout Circuit  
The measurement and adjustment results specified beforehand by serial command $39 can be read out from  
the SENS pin by inputting the readout clock to the SCLK pin. (See Fig. 5-18, Table 5-19 and "Description of  
SENS Signals".)  
Specified commands  
See the table on page 180.  
XLAT  
tSPW  
t
DLS  
· · ·  
· · ·  
SCLK  
1/fSCLK  
Serial Readout Data  
(SENS pin)  
MSB  
LSB  
Fig. 5-18.  
Item  
Symbol  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
16  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
SCLK frequency  
SCLK pulse width  
Delay time  
fSCLK  
t
t
SPW  
DLS  
31.3  
15  
µs  
Table 5-19.  
During readout, the upper 8 bits of the command register must be 39 (h).  
– 165 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM  
The coefficient RAM can be rewritten by $34. All coefficients have default values in the built-in ROM, and  
transfer from the ROM to the RAM is completed approximately 40µs (when MCK = 128Fs) after the XRST pin  
rises. (The coefficient RAM cannot be rewritten during this period.)  
After that, the characteristics of each built-in filter can be finely adjusted by rewriting the data for each address  
of the coefficient RAM.  
The coefficient rewrite command is comprised of 24 bits, with D14 to D8 of $34 as the address (D15 = 0) and  
D7 to D0 as the data. Coefficient rewriting is completed 11.3µs (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is  
received. When rewriting multiple coefficients continuously, be sure to wait 11.3µs (when MCK = 128Fs) before  
sending the next rewrite command.  
§5-16. PWM Output  
FCS, TRK and SLD PWM format outputs are described below.  
In particular, FCS and TRK use a double oversampling noise shaper.  
Timing Chart 5-20 and Fig. 5-21 show examples of output waveforms and drive circuits.  
MCK  
(5.6448MHz) ↑  
Output value +A  
Output value –A  
64tMCK  
Output value 0  
64tMCK  
SLD  
64tMCK  
SFDR  
SRDR  
AtMCK  
AtMCK  
FCS/TRK  
32tMCK  
32tMCK  
32tMCK  
32tMCK  
32tMCK  
32tMCK  
FFDR/  
TFDR  
A
2
A
2
t
MCK  
tMCK  
FRDR/  
TRDR  
A
2
A
2
t
MCK  
tMCK  
1
t
MCK =  
180ns  
5.6448MHz  
Timing Chart 5-20.  
VCC  
R
R
R
DRV  
RDR  
FDR  
R
V
EE  
Fig. 5-21. Drive Circuit  
– 166 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal  
When the LOCK signal becomes low, the TRK servo switches to the gain-up mode and the SLD servo turns off  
in order to prevent SLD free-running.  
Setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1" deactivates this function.  
In other words, neither the TRK servo nor the SLD servo change even when the LOCK signal becomes low.  
This enables microcomputer control.  
§5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets  
$34  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
0
KA6 KA5 KA4 KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0 KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0  
When D15 = 0.  
KA6 to KA0: Coefficient address  
KD7 to KD0: Coefficient data  
$348 (preset: $348 000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
0
0
0
PGFS1PGFS0PFOK1PFOK0  
MRS MRT1 MRT0  
These commands set the GFS signal hold time. The hold time is inversely proportional to the playback speed.  
PGFS1 PGFS0  
Processing  
0
0
0
1
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when not the correct timing.  
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the  
correct timing for 2ms or longer.  
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the  
correct timing for 4ms or longer.  
1
1
0
1
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the  
correct timing for 8ms or longer.  
These commands set the FOK signal hold time. See $3B for the FOK slice level.  
These are the values when MCK = 128Fs, and the hold time is inversely proportional to the MCK setting.  
PFOK1 PFOK0  
Processing  
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when lower than  
the FOK slice level.  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously  
lower than the FOK slice level for 4.35ms or more.  
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously  
lower than the FOK slice level for 10.16ms or more.  
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously  
lower than the FOK slice level for 21.77ms or more.  
– 167 –  
CXD3048R  
MRS:  
This command switches the time constant for generating the MIRR comparator level of the  
MIRR generation circuit.  
When "0", the time constant is normal. (default)  
When "1", the time constant is longer than normal.  
The time during which MIRR = high due to the effects of RFDC signal pulse noise, etc.,  
can be suppressed by setting MRS = 1.  
MRT1, MRT0:  
These commands limit the time while MIRR = high.  
MRT1  
MRT0 MIRR maximum time [ms]  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No time limit  
1.10  
2.20  
4.00  
: preset  
$34A (preset: $34A 150)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
A/D COPY EMPH CAT DOUT DOUT DOUT WIN DOUT  
D9  
D8  
b8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
0
1
0
SEL  
EN  
D
EN1 DMUT WOD EN EN2  
Processing  
Command bit  
A/DSEL = 0  
A/DSEL = 1  
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as audio data.  
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as other than audio data.  
Command bit  
COPY EN = 0  
COPY EN = 1  
Processing  
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy prohibited.  
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy enabled.  
Command bit  
EMPH D = 0  
EMPH D = 1  
Processing  
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as without pre-emphasis.  
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as with pre-emphasis.  
Command bit  
CAT b8 = 0  
CAT b8 = 1  
Processing  
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "0".  
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "1".  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT EN1 = 0 The DOUT signal, generated from the PCM data read out from the disc, is output.  
DOUT EN1 = 1 The DOUT signal, generated from the DA interface input, is output.  
– 168 –  
CXD3048R  
$34A commands cont.  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT DMUT = 0 Digital Out output is normally output.  
DOUT DMUT = 1 All the audio data portions are output in zero, with Digital Out output as it is.  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT WOD = 0 The DOUT sync window is not open.  
DOUT WOD = 1 The DOUT sync window is open.  
Command bit  
Processing  
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal  
processing is disabled.  
WIN EN = 0  
WIN EN = 1  
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal  
processing is disabled.  
Command bit  
Processing  
DOUT EN2 = 0 Set to "0" when not generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.  
DOUT EN2 = 1 Set to "1" when generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.  
DOUT  
EN1  
DOUT  
DMUT  
Other mute  
conditions  
DOUT  
Mute  
DOUT  
Mute F  
$B MD2  
DOUT output  
OFF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0dB  
The output from the PCM  
data read out from a disc.  
dB  
The output from the PCM  
data read out from a disc.  
0dB  
1
1
0
1
The output from the DA  
interface input.  
dB  
The output from the DA  
interface input.  
—: don't care  
See "Mute conditions" (1) and (3) to (5) of $AX commands for the other mute conditions.  
See $8 commands for DOUT Mute and DOUT Mute F.  
– 169 –  
CXD3048R  
$34B (preset: $34B 000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
0
D8  
0
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
0
1
1
SFBK1 SFBK2  
LB1SN LB2SNLB2SM  
The low frequency can be boosted for brake operation.  
See §5-12 for brake operation.  
SFBK1: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-1 input to "0".  
This is valid only when TLB1ON = 1. Preset is "0".  
SFBK2: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-2 input to "0".  
This is valid only when TLB2ON = 1. Preset is "0".  
See the $34C command booster setting for LB1SN, LB2SN and LB2SM.  
$34C (preset: $34C 000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
0
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
1
0
0
THBON FHBON TLB1ON FLB1ON TLB2ON  
HBST1HBST0 LB1S1 LB1S0 LB2S1 LB2S0  
These bits turn on the boost function. (See §5-20. Filter Composition.)  
There are five boosters (three for the TRK filter and two for the FCS filter) which can be turned on and off  
independently.  
THBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".  
FHBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".  
TLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".  
FLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".  
TLB2ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".  
The difference between TLB1ON and TLB2ON is the position where the low frequency is boosted.  
For TLB1ON, the low frequency is boosted before the TRK jump, and for TLB2ON, after the TRK jump.  
The following commands set the boosters. (See §5-20. Filter Composition.)  
HBST1, HBST0: TRK and FCS HighBooster setting.  
HighBooster has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22a, and can select three different  
combinations of coefficients BK1, BK2 and BK3. (See Table 5-23a.)  
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24a.  
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.  
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).  
LB1S1, LB1S0, LB1SN:  
TRK and FCS LowBooster-1 setting.  
LowBooster-1 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22b, and can select six different  
combinations of coefficients BK4, BK5 and BK6. (See Table 5-23b.)  
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24b.  
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.  
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).  
LB2S1, LB2S0, LB2SN, LB2SM:  
TRK LowBooster-2 setting.  
LowBooster-2 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22c, and can select six different  
combinations of coefficients BK7, BK8 and BK9. (See Table 5-23c.)  
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24c.  
This booster is used exclusively for the TRK filter.  
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).  
Note) Fs = 44.1kHz  
– 170 –  
CXD3048R  
HighBooster setting  
BK2  
BK3  
HBST0  
HBST1  
BK1  
BK3  
Z –1  
Z –1  
0
1
1
0
1
–120/128  
–124/128  
–126/128  
96/128  
112/128  
120/128  
2
2
2
BK1  
BK2  
—: don't care  
Fig. 5-22a.  
Table. 5-23a.  
LowBooster-1 setting  
BK4  
BK5  
Characteristic  
diagram  
BK6  
LB1S1 LB1S0 LB1SN  
1
BK6  
Z –1  
Z –1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
–255/256  
–511/512  
–1023/1024 4095/4096 1/4  
–127/128  
–255/256  
–511/512  
1023/1024 1/4  
2047/2048 1/4  
BK4  
BK5  
255/256  
511/512  
1
1
1
Fig. 5-22b.  
1023/1024  
—: don't care  
Table. 5-23b.  
LowBooster-2 setting  
Characteristic  
diagram  
BK9  
LB2S1 LB2S0 LB2SN LB2SM  
1
BK7  
BK8  
BK9  
Z –1  
Z –1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
–255/256  
–511/512  
–1023/1024  
–31/32  
1023/1024 1/4  
2047/2048 1/4  
4095/4096 1/4  
BK7  
BK8  
127/128  
255/256  
1
1
1
1
1
1
–63/64  
Fig. 5-22c.  
–127/128  
–255/256  
–511/512  
–1023/1024  
511/512  
1023/1024  
2047/2048  
4095/4096  
—: don't care  
Table. 5-23c.  
1
2
1
1
to  
to  
correspond to  
correspond to  
1
1
to  
to  
in Fig. 5-23b respectively.  
in Fig. 5-23c respectively.  
6
9
6
9
– 171 –  
CXD3048R  
15  
12  
9
3
2
1
6
3
0
–3  
–6  
–9  
–12  
–15  
1
10  
100  
Frequency [Hz]  
1k  
10k  
+90  
+72  
3
2
1
+36  
0
–36  
–72  
–90  
1
10  
100  
Frequency [Hz]  
1k  
10k  
Fig. 5-24a. Servo HighBooster characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)  
1
2
3
HBST1 = 0  
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 0  
– 172 –  
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 1  
CXD3048R  
15  
12  
9
6
5
4
6
3
0
–3  
–6  
–9  
3
2
1
–12  
–15  
18  
1
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency [Hz]  
6
5
4
0
–18  
–36  
–54  
3
2
1
–72  
–90  
1
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency [Hz]  
Fig. 5-24b. Servo LowBooster-1 characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)  
1
6
1
6
(
to  
correspond to  
to  
in Table 5-23b respectively.)  
– 173 –  
CXD3048R  
15  
12  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
6
3
0
–3  
–6  
–9  
3
2
1
–12  
–15  
18  
1
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency [Hz]  
0
–18  
–36  
–54  
3
9
2
8
1
7
6
5
4
–72  
–90  
1
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
Frequency [Hz]  
Fig. 5-24c. Servo LowBooster-2 characteristics [TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)  
1
9
1
9
(
to  
correspond to  
to  
in Table 5-23c respectively.)  
– 174 –  
CXD3048R  
$34E (preset: $34E000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
D0  
1
1
1
0
IDFSL3 IDFSL2 IDFSL1 IDFSL0  
DFSLS IDFT1 IDFT0  
LPDF0 INVRFDC  
IDFSL3:  
New DFCT detection output setting.  
When "0", only the DFCT signal described in §5-9 is detected and output from the DFCT  
pin. (default)  
When "1", the DFCT signal described in §5-9 and the new DFCT signal are switched and  
output from the DFCT pin.  
The switching timing is as follows.  
When the §5-9 DFCT signal is low, the new DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.  
When the §5-9 DFCT signal is high, this DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.  
In addition, the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output after the ¤5-9 DFCT signal  
switches to low can also be set. (See IDFT1 and IDFT0 of $34E.)  
IDFSL3  
§5-9 DFCT  
DFCT pin  
§5-9 DFCT  
0
0
1
1
L
H
L
§5-9 DFCT  
New DFCT  
§5-9 DFCT  
H
IDFSL2:  
New DFCT detection time setting.  
DFCT = high is held for a certain time after new DFCT detection. This command sets that time.  
When "0", a long hold time. (default)  
When "1", a short hold time.  
IDFSL1:  
IDFSL0:  
DFSLS:  
New DFCT detection sensitivity setting.  
When "0", a high detection sensitivity. (default)  
When "1", a low detection sensitivity.  
New DFCT release sensitivity setting.  
When "0", a high release sensitivity. (default)  
When "1", a low release sensitivity.  
DFCT slice level setting mode switching.  
When "0", the two bits of $3B commands SDF2 and SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice  
level as usual. (default)  
When "1", the six bits of $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3 and $3B commands SDF2 and  
SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice level.  
IDFT1, IDFT0:  
These commands set the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output (output  
prohibited time) after the §5-9 DFCT signal switches to low.  
IDFT1  
IDFT0  
New DFCT signal output prohibited time  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
204.08µs  
294.78µs  
408.16µs  
612.24µs  
: preset  
LPDF0:  
DFCT signal generation mode switching.  
When "0", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is as  
usual. (default)  
When "1", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is  
weighed.  
INVRFDC:  
RFDC signal polarity inverted input setting.  
When "0", the RFDC signal polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)  
When "1", the RFDC signal polarity is set to inverted.  
– 175 –  
CXD3048R  
$34F  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
1
1
1
1
0
FBL9 FBL8 FBL7 FBL6 FBL5 FBL4 FBL3 FBL2 FBL1  
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = D11 = 1 ($34F)  
D10 = 0  
FBIAS LIMIT register write  
FBL9 to FBL1: Data; data compared with FB9 to FB1, FBL9 = MSB.  
When using the FBIAS register in counter mode, counter operation stops when the value  
of FB9 to FB1 matches with FBL9 to FBL1.  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
1
1
1
0
1
FB9 FB8 FB7 FB6 FB5 FB4 FB3 FB2 FB1  
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)  
D11 = 0, D10 = 1  
FBIAS register write  
FB9 to FB1: Data; two's complement data, FB9 = MSB.  
For FE input conversion, FB9 to FB1 = 011111111 corresponds to 255/256 × VDD/4  
and FB9 to FB1 = 100000000 to –256/256 × VDD/4 respectively. (VDD: supply voltage)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
1
1
1
0
0
TV9 TV8 TV7 TV6 TV5 TV4 TV3 TV2 TV1 TV0  
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)  
D11 = 0, D10 = 0  
TRVSC register write  
TV9 to TV0: Data; two's complement data, TV9 = MSB.  
For TE input conversion, TV9 to TV0 = 0011111111 corresponds to 255/256 × VDD/4  
and TV9 to TV0 = 1100000000 to –256/256 × VDD/4 respectively. (VDD: supply voltage)  
Notes) • When the TRVSC register is read out, the data length is 9 bits. At this time, data corresponding to  
each bit TV8 to TV0 during external write are read out.  
When reading out internally measured values and then writing these values externally, set TV9 the  
same as TV8.  
– 176 –  
CXD3048R  
$35 (preset: $35 58 2D)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FT1 FT0 FS5 FS4 FS3 FS2 FS1 FS0 FTZ FG6 FG5 FG4 FG3 FG2 FG1 FG0  
FT1, FT0, FTZ: Focus search-up speed  
Default value: 010 (0.673 × VDDV/s)  
Focus drive output conversion  
FT1  
FT0  
FTZ  
Focus search speed [V/s]  
1.35 × VDD  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0.673 × VDD  
0.449 × VDD  
0.336 × VDD  
1.79 × VDD  
1.08 × VDD  
0.897 × VDD  
0.769 × VDD  
: preset, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage  
FS5 to FS0:  
FG6 to FG0:  
Focus search limit voltage  
Default value: 011000 ((1 ± 24/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)  
Focus drive output conversion  
AGF convergence gain setting value  
Default value: 0101101  
$36 (preset: $36 0E 2E)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TDZC DTZC TJ5 TJ4 TJ3 TJ2 TJ1 TJ0 SFJP TG6 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 TG1 TG0  
TDZC:  
Selects the TZC signal for generating the TRKCNCL signal during brake circuit operation.  
When "0", the edge of the HPTZC or STZC signal, whichever has the faster phase, is used.  
When "1", the edge of the HPTZC, STZC signal or the tracking drive signal zero-cross,  
whichever has the faster phase, is used. (See §5-12.)  
DTZC delay (8.5/4.25µs, when MCK = 128Fs)  
DTZC:  
Default value: 0 (4.25µs)  
TJ5 to TJ0:  
Track jump voltage  
Default value: 001110 ((1 ± 14/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)  
Tracking drive output conversion  
SFJP:  
Surf jump mode on/off  
The tracking PWM output is generated by adding the tracking filter output and TJReg (TJ5  
to TJ0), by setting D7 to "1" (on)  
TG6 to TG0:  
AGT convergence gain setting value  
Default value: 0101110  
– 177 –  
CXD3048R  
$37 (preset: $37 50 BA)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FZSH FZSL SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SM0 AGS AGJ AGGF AGGT AGV1 AGV2 AGHS AGHT  
FZSH, FZSL:  
FZC (Focus Zero Cross) slice level  
Default value: 01 (1/8 × VDD/2, VDD: supply voltage); FE input conversion  
FZSH  
FZSL  
Slice level  
1/4 × VDD/2  
1/8 × VDD/2  
1/16 × VDD/2  
1/32 × VDD/2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
: preset  
SM5 to SM0:  
Sled move voltage  
Default value: 010000 ((1 ± 16/64) × VDD/2, VDD: PWM driver supply voltage)  
Sled drive output conversion  
AGS:  
AGJ:  
AGCNTL self-stop on/off  
Default value: 1 (on)  
AGCNTL convergence completion judgment time during low sensitivity adjustment  
(31/63ms, when MCK = 128Fs)  
Default value: 0 (63ms)  
AGGF:  
AGGT:  
Focus AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)  
Default value: 1 (large)  
Tracking AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)  
Default value: 1 (large)  
FE/TE input conversion  
0 (small) 1/32 to VDD/2  
AGGF  
1 (large) 1/16 to VDD/2  
0 (small) 1/16 to VDD/2  
AGGT  
1 (large) 1/8 to VDD/2  
: preset  
AGV1:  
AGV2:  
AGHS:  
AGHT:  
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during high sensitivity adjustment; high/low  
Default value: 1 (high)  
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during low sensitivity adjustment; high/low  
Default value: 0 (low)  
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment on/off  
Default value: 1 (on)  
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment time (128/256ms, when MCK = 128Fs)  
Default value: 0 (256ms)  
– 178 –  
CXD3048R  
$38 (preset: $38 00 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
VCLM VCLC FLM FLC0 RFLM RFLC AGF AGT DFSW LKSW TBLM TCLM FLC1 TLC2 TLC1 TLC0  
DC offset cancel. See §5-3.  
VCLM: VC level measurement (on/off)  
VCLC: VC level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)  
FLM:  
Focus zero level measurement (on/off)  
FLC0:  
Focus zero level compensation for FZC register (on/off)  
RFLM: RF zero level measurement (on/off)  
RFLC: RF zero level compensation (on/off)  
Automatic gain control. See §5-6.  
AGF:  
AGT:  
Focus auto gain adjustment (on/off)  
Tracking auto gain adjustment (on/off)  
Misoperation prevention circuit  
DFSW: Defect disable switch (on/off)  
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the defect countermeasure circuit.  
LKSW: Lock switch (on/off)  
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the sled free-running prevention circuit.  
DC offset cancel. See §5-3.  
TBLM: Traverse center measurement (on/off)  
TCLM: Tracking zero level measurement (on/off)  
FLC1:  
TLC2:  
TLC1:  
TLC0:  
Focus zero level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)  
Traverse center compensation (on/off)  
Tracking zero level compensation (on/off)  
VC level compensation for TRK/SLD In register (on/off)  
Note) Commands marked with are accepted every 2.9ms. (when MCK = 128Fs)  
All commands are on when "1".  
– 179 –  
CXD3048R  
$39 (preset: $390000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
DAC SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0  
When $3A command SVDA = 0  
DAC:  
Serial data readout DAC mode setting.  
When "0", serial data cannot be read out. (default)  
When "1", serial data can be read out.  
These bits select the serial readout data.  
SD6 to SD0:  
D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
Readout data  
length  
Readout data  
SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Coefficient RAM address  
Data RAM address  
Coefficient RAM data  
Data RAM data  
RF AVRG register  
RFDC input signal  
FCS Bias register  
TRVSC register  
DFCT count  
8 bits  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
RFDC (Bottom)  
RFDC (Peak)  
1
0
0
1
RFDC (Peak – Bottom)  
VC AVRG register  
FE AVRG register  
TE AVRG register  
FE input signal  
1
1
1
0
TE input signal  
0
1
SE input signal  
0
0
VC input signal  
—: don't care  
Note) When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.  
– 180 –  
CXD3048R  
When $3A command SVDA = 1  
DAC:  
This command selects whether to set readout data for the left or right channel.  
When "0", right channel readout data is selected. (default)  
When "1", left channel readout data is selected.  
SD6 to SD0:  
These bits select the data to be output from the left or right channel.  
D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1 SD0  
Data RAM address  
D9  
D8  
Readout data  
length  
Readout data  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data RAM data  
16 bits  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
RF AVRG register  
RFDC input signal  
FCS Bias register  
TRVSC register  
8 bits  
8 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
9 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
8 bits  
FCS output signal  
TRK output signal  
VC AVRG register  
FE AVRG register  
FE (A-B): FCS in Reg  
TE (E-F): TRK in Reg  
TE AVRG register  
FE input signal  
1
2
TE input signal  
SE input signal  
VC input signal  
1
2
Right channel preset  
Left channel preset  
Note) Coefficient RAM data cannot be output from the audio DAC side.  
Do not output RFDC (peak, bottom, peak-bottom) or the DFCT count from the audio  
DAC side.  
When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.  
The DFCT count counts the number of times the DFCT signal rises while $3994 is set.  
Readout outputs the DFCT count at that time.  
Memory Readout  
The following three memories can be readout without waiting the memory access.  
M02 (Sled filter final memory)  
M12 (Focus hold filter final memory)  
M1A (Track hold filter final memory)  
– 181 –  
CXD3048R  
$3A (D15 = 0) (preset: $3A0000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
0
FBON FBSS FBUP FBV1 FBV0 FIFZC TJD0 FPS1 FPS0 TPS1 TPS0 SVDA SJHD INBK MTI0  
FBIAS (focus bias) register operation setting.  
FBON:  
FBSS  
FBUP  
FBON  
FBSS  
FBUP  
Processing  
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition off.  
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition on.  
FBIAS register acts as a down counter.  
FBIAS register acts as an up counter.  
1
—: don't care  
FBV1, FBV0: FBIAS (focus bias) counter voltage switching.  
The number of FCS BIAS count-up/-down steps per cycle is decided by these bits.  
The counter changes once for  
each sampling cycle of the  
focus servo filter. When MCK  
is 128Fs, the sampling  
frequency is 88.2kHz. When  
converted to FE input, 1 step  
is approximately 1/29 × VDD/2,  
VDD = supply voltage.  
FBV1  
FBV0  
Number of steps per cycle  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
: preset  
FIFZC:  
TJDO:  
This selects the FZC slice level setting command.  
When "0", the FZC slice level is determined by the $37 FZSH and FZSL setting values. (default)  
When "1", the FZC slice level is determined by the $3F8 FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to  
FIFZA0 setting values.  
This allows more detailed setting and the addition of hysteresis compared to the $37 FZSH  
and FZSL setting.  
This sets the tracking servo filter data RAM to "0" when switched from track jump to servo  
on only when SFJP = 1 (during surf jump operation).  
FPS1, FPS0: Gain setting when transferring data from the focus filter to the PWM block.  
TPS1, TPS0:  
Gain setting when transferring data from the tracking filter to the PWM block.  
These are effective for increasing the overall gain in order to widen the servo band, etc.  
Operation when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00 is the same as usual (7-bit shift). However,  
6dB, 12dB and 18dB can be selected independently for focus and tracking by setting the  
relative gain to 0dB when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00.  
FPS1  
FPS0  
Relative gain  
0dB  
TPS1  
TPS0  
Relative gain  
0dB  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
+6dB  
+6dB  
+12dB  
+18dB  
+12dB  
+18dB  
: preset  
SVDA:  
This allows the data set by the $39 command to be output through the audio DAC.  
When "0", audio is output. (default)  
When "1", the data set by the $39 command is output.  
SJHD:  
INBK:  
This holds the tracking filter output at the value when surf jump starts during surf jump.  
When INBK = 0 (off), the brake circuit masks the tracking drive signal with the TRKCNCL  
signal which is generated by taking the MIRR signal at the TZC edge. When INBK = 1 (on),  
the tracking filter input is masked instead of the drive output.  
The tracking filter input is masked when the MIRR signal is high by setting MTI0 = 1 (on).  
– 182 –  
MTI0:  
CXD3048R  
$3A8 (preset : $3A 80 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
0
0
0
FPGS1 FPGS0 TPGS1 TPGS0  
FPGS1, FPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before FCS SRCH.  
TPGS1, TPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before TRK JMP.  
FPGS1 FPGS0  
Gain  
0dB  
TPGS1 TPGS0  
Gain  
0dB  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
+6dB  
+12dB  
+18dB  
+6dB  
+12dB  
+18dB  
: preset  
: preset  
$3A9 (preset : $3A 90 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
0
D8  
D7  
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
UDFZC  
UDFZC:  
This detects FZC not depending on the search direction.  
When "0", FZC is detected for UP search. (conventional system: default)  
When "1", FZC is detected not depending on the search direction.  
$3AFF (preset : $3A FF 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
1
D8  
1
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
D2  
D1  
0
D0  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
SRQ1 SRQ0  
SRQ1, SRQ0: These bits select the ASYO output delay time.  
SRQ1 SRQ0 ASYO output delay time  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Approx. 0ns  
Approx. 5ns  
Approx. 10ns  
Approx. 15ns  
: preset  
– 183 –  
CXD3048R  
$3B (preset: $3B E0 50)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
SFO2 SFO1 SDF2 SDF1 MAX2 MAX1 SFOX BTF D2V2 D2V1 D1V2 D1V1 RINT  
SFOX, SFO2, SFO1: FOK slice level  
Default value: 011 (28/256 × VDD/2, VDD = supply voltage)  
RFDC input conversion  
SFOX SFO2 SFO1  
Slice level  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16/256 × VDD/2  
20/256 × VDD/2  
24/256 × VDD/2  
28/256 × VDD/2  
32/256 × VDD/2  
40/256 × VDD/2  
48/256 × VDD/2  
56/256 × VDD/2  
: preset  
SDF2, SDF1:  
DFCT slice level  
Default value: 10 (0.0313 × VDD)  
RFDC input conversion  
SFO2 SFO1  
Slice level  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.0156 × VDD  
0.0234 × VDD  
0.0313 × VDD  
0.0391 × VDD  
: preset, VDD: supply voltage  
See the $34E command DFSLS and $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3.  
MAX2, MAX1:  
DFCT maximum time (MCK = 128Fs)  
Default value: 00 (no timer limit)  
MAX2 MAX1 DFCT maximum time  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No timer limit  
2.00ms  
2.36ms  
*
2.72ms  
: preset  
BTF:  
Bottom hold double-speed count-up mode for MIRR signal generation  
On/off (default: off)  
On when "1".  
– 184 –  
CXD3048R  
D2V2, D2V1:  
D1V2, D1V1:  
RINT:  
Peak hold 2 for DFCT signal generation  
Count-down speed setting  
Default value: 01 (0.086 × VDD/ms, 44.1kHz)  
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate  
the operating frequency of the internal counter.  
Count-down speed  
D2V2  
D2V1  
[V/ms]  
[kHz]  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.0431 × VDD  
0.0861 × VDD  
0.172 × VDD  
0.344 × VDD  
22.05  
44.1  
88.2  
176.4  
: preset, VDD: supply voltage  
Peak hold 1 for DFCT signal generation  
Count-down speed setting  
Default value: 01 (0.688 × VDD/ms, 352.8kHz)  
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate  
the operating frequency of the internal counter.  
Count-down speed  
D1V2  
D1V1  
[V/ms]  
[kHz]  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.344 × VDD  
0.688 × VDD  
1.38 × VDD  
2.75 × VDD  
176.4  
352.8  
705.6  
1411.2  
: preset, VDD: supply voltage  
This initializes the initial-stage registers of the circuits which generate MIRR, DFCT and FOK.  
– 185 –  
CXD3048R  
$3C (preset: $3C 00 80)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
0
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
COSS COTS CETZ CETF COT2 COT1 MOT2  
BTS1 BTS0 MRC1 MRC0  
COSS, COTS: These select the TZC signal used when generating the COUT signal.  
COSS  
COTS  
TZC  
1
0
0
0
1
STZC  
HPTZC  
DTZC  
: preset, —: don't care  
STZC is the TZC generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)  
DTZC is the delayed phase STZC. (The delay time can be selected by D14 of $36.)  
HPTZC is the fast phase TZC passed through a HPF with a cut-off frequency of 1kHz.  
See §5-13.  
CETZ:  
CETF:  
Normally, the input from the TE pin enters the TRK filter and is used to generate the TZC  
signal. However, the input from the CE pin can also be used. This function is for the center  
error servo.  
When "0", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the TE pin.  
When "1", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the CE pin.  
When "0", the signal input to the TE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.  
When "1", the signal input to the CE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.  
These commands output the TZC signal.  
COT2, COT1: The COUT signal is replaced by the TZC signal. Concretely, the TZC signal is output from  
the COUT pin and the TZC signal is used for auto sequence instead of the COUT signal.  
COT2  
COT1  
COUT pin output  
STZC  
HPTZC  
COUT  
1
0
0
1
0
: preset, —: don't care  
MOT2:  
The MIRR signal is replaced by the STZC signal. Concretely, the STZC signal is output from  
the MIRR pin and the STZC signal is used for generating the COUT signal instead of the  
MIRR signal.  
These commands set the MIRR signal generation circuit.  
BTS1, BTS0: These set the count-up speed for the bottom hold value of the MIRR generation circuit.  
The time per step is approximately 708ns (when MCK = 128Fs). The preset value is BTS1 = 1,  
BTS0 = 0 like the CXD2586R. These bits are valid only when BTF of $3B is "0".  
MRC1, MRC0: These set the minimum pulse width for masking the MIRR signal of the MIRR generation circuit.  
As noted in §5-9, the MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform obtained by  
subtracting the bottom hold value from the peak hold value with the MIRR comparator  
level. Strictly speaking, however, for MIRR to become high, these levels must be compared  
continuously for a certain time. These bits set that time.  
The preset value is MRC1 = 0, MRC0 = 0 like the CXD2586R.  
MRC1 MRC0 Setting time [µs]  
BTS1 BTS0 Number of count-up steps per cycle  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5.669  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8
11.338  
22.675  
45.351  
: preset (when MCK = 128Fs)  
– 186 –  
CXD3048R  
$3D (preset: $3D 00 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
SFID SFSK THID THSK ABEF TLD2 TLD1 TLD0 SDF6 SDF5 SDF4 SDF3  
SFID:  
SFSK:  
THID:  
THSK:  
SLED servo filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the  
TRK filter second-stage output.  
When the low frequency component of the tracking error signal obtained from the RF  
amplifier is attenuated, the low frequency can be amplified and input to the SLD servo filter.  
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K30 is used instead of K00. Normally,  
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain  
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted  
to M00 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K30 value even during the above switching.  
TRK hold filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the TRK  
filter second-stage output.  
When signals other than the tracking error signal from the RF amplifier are input to the SE  
input pin, the signal transmitted from the TE pin can be obtained as TRK hold filter input.  
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K46 is used instead of K40. Normally,  
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain  
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted  
to M18 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K46 value even during the above switching.  
See "§5-20. Filter Composition" regarding the SFID, SFSK, THID and THSK commands.  
The focus error (FE) and tracking error (TE) can be generated internally.  
When 0, the FE and TE signal input mode results. Input each error signal through the FE  
and TE pins. (default)  
ABEF:  
When 1, the FE and TE signal generation mode results and the FE and TE signals are  
generated internally.  
TLD2 to TLD0: These turn on and off SLD filter correction independently of the TRK filter.  
See $38 (TLC0 to TLC2) and Fig. 5-3.  
Traverse center correction  
TLC2  
TLD2  
TRK filter  
OFF  
SLD filter  
OFF  
0
1
0
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
OFF  
Tracking zero level correction  
TLC1  
TLD1  
TRK filter  
OFF  
SLD filter  
OFF  
0
1
0
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
OFF  
VC level correction  
TLC0  
TLD0  
TRK filter  
OFF  
SLD filter  
OFF  
0
1
0
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
OFF  
: preset, —: don't care  
– 187 –  
CXD3048R  
SDF6 to SDF3: These set the DEFECT slice level when the $34E command DFSLS = 1.  
SDF6 to SDF1  
111111  
111110  
111101  
:
Slice level  
63/256 × VDD/2  
62/256 × VDD/2  
61/256 × VDD/2  
:
000010  
000001  
000000  
2/256 × VDD/2  
1/256 × VDD/2  
0
: preset  
Note) Set SDF2 and SDF1 with the $3B command.  
Input coefficient sign inversion when SFID = 1 and THID = 1  
The preset coefficients for the TRK filter are negative for input and positive for output. With this, the CXD3048R  
outputs servo drives which have the reversed phase of input errors.  
Negative input coefficient  
K19  
Positive output coefficient  
K22  
TE  
TRK filter  
SLD filter  
Negative input coefficient  
K00  
Positive output coefficient  
K05  
SE  
Positive input coefficient  
K40  
Positive output coefficient  
K45  
TRK Hold  
TRK Hold filter  
When SFID = 1, the TRK filter negative input coefficient is applied to the SLD filter, so the SLD input coefficient  
(K00) sign must be inverted. (For example, inverting the sign for coefficient K00: E0h results in 20h.)  
For the same reason, when THID = 1, the TRK hold input coefficient (K40) sign must be inverted.  
Negative input coefficient  
K19  
Positive output coefficient  
K22  
TRK filter  
M0D  
TE  
Positive input coefficient  
K00  
Positive output coefficient  
K05  
SLD filter  
SE  
Negative input coefficient  
K40  
Positive output coefficient  
K45  
TRK Hold  
TRK Hold filter  
For TRK servo gain normal  
See "§5-20. Filter Composition".  
– 188 –  
CXD3048R  
$3E (preset: $3E 00 00)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
0
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
F1NM F1DM F3NM F3DM T1NM T1UM T3NM T3UM DFIS TLCD  
LKIN COIN MDFI MIRI XT1D  
F1NM, F1DM:  
T1NM, T1UM:  
F3NM, F3DM:  
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter first-stage  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
F1NM: Gain normal  
F1DM: Gain down  
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter first-stage  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
T1NM: Gain normal  
T1UM: Gain up  
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter third-stage  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the FCS servo  
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.  
F3NM: Gain normal  
F3DM: Gain down  
T3NM, T3UM:  
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter third-stage  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the TRK servo  
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.  
T3NM: Gain normal  
T3UM: Gain up  
Note) Filter first- and third-stage quasi double accuracy settings can be set individually.  
See "§5-20 Filter Composition" at the end of this specification concerning quasi double accuracy.  
DFIS:  
FCS hold filter input extraction node selection  
0: M05 (Data RAM address 05); default  
1: M04 (Data RAM address 04)  
TLCD:  
LKIN:  
COIN:  
This command masks the TLC2 command set by D2 of $38 only when FOK is low.  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
When "0", the internally generated LOCK signal is output to the LOCK pin. (default)  
When "1", the LOCK signal can be input from an external source to the LOCK pin.  
When "0", the internally generated COUT signal is output to the COUT pin. (default)  
When "1", the COUT signal can be input from an external source to the COUT pin.  
The MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can also be input from an external source.  
MDFI:  
When "0", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals are generated internally. (default)  
When "1", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can be input from an external source  
through the MIRR, DFCT and FOK pins.  
MIRI:  
When "0", the MIRR signal is generated internally. (default)  
When "1", the MIRR signal can be input from an external source through the MIRR pin.  
MDFI  
MIRI  
0
0
0
1
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all generated internally.  
MIRR only is input from an external source.  
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all input from an external source.  
: preset, —: don't care  
1
XT1D:  
The input to the servo master clock is used without being frequency-divided by setting  
XT1D to "1". This command takes precedence over the XTSL pin, XT2D and XT4D. See  
the description of $3F for XT2D and XT4D.  
– 189 –  
CXD3048R  
$3F (preset: $3F 00 10)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
0
D6  
D5  
D4  
1
D3  
D2  
0
D1  
D0  
0
AGG4 XT4D XT2D  
0
DRR2 DRR1 DRR0  
ASFG FTQ  
SRO1  
AGHF ASOT  
AGG4:  
This varies the amplitude of the internally generated sine wave using the AGGF and AGGT  
commands during AGC.  
When AGG4 = 0, the default is used. When AGG4 = 1, the setting is as shown in the table below.  
Sine wave amplitude  
AGG4 AGGF AGGT  
FE input  
TE input  
See $37 for AGGF and AGGT.  
The presets are AGG4 = 0,  
AGGF = 1 and AGGT = 1.  
conversion  
conversion  
0
1
0
1/32 × VDD/2  
1/16 × VDD/2  
0
1
0
1/16 × VDD/2  
1/8 × VDD/2  
1
0
1/64 × VDD/2  
0
1
1/32 × VDD/2  
1/16 × VDD/2  
1/8 × VDD/2  
1
0
1
1
: preset, —: don't care  
XT4D, XT2D:  
MCK (digital servo master clock) frequency division ratio setting  
This command forcibly sets the frequency division ratio to 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 when MCK is  
generated. See the description of $3E for XT1D. Also, see "§5-2. Digital Servo Block  
Master Clock (MCK)".  
XT1D  
XT2D  
XT4D  
Frequency division ratio  
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
According to XTSL  
1/1  
1/2  
1/4  
0
: preset, —: don't care  
DRR2 to DRR0: Partially clears the Data RAM values ("0" write).  
The following values are cleared when "1" (on) respectively; default is "0".  
DRR2: M08, M09, M0A  
DRR1: M00, M01, M02  
DRR0: M00, M01, M02 only when LOCK = low  
Note) Set DRR1 and DRR0 on for 50µs or more.  
When vibration detection is performed during anti-shock circuit operation, the FCS servo  
filter is forcibly set to gain normal status.  
ASFG:  
FTQ:  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
The slope of the output during focus search is 1/4 the conventional output slope.  
On when "1"; default is "0".  
– 190 –  
CXD3048R  
SRO1:  
This command is used to continuously externally output various data inside the digital  
servo block which have been specified with the $39 command. (However, D15 (DAC) of  
$39 must be set to "1".)  
Digital output (SOCK, XOLT and SOUT) can be obtained from three specified pins by  
setting this command to "1".  
SRO1 = 1  
SOLK Output from XPCK pin.  
XOLT Output from GFS pin.  
SOUT Output from XUGF pin.  
AGHF:  
ASOT:  
This halves the frequency of the internally generated sine wave during AGC.  
The anti-shock signal, which is internally detected, is output from the ATSK pin.  
Output when "1"; default is "0".  
Vibration detection when a high signal is output for the anti-shock signal output.  
– 191 –  
CXD3048R  
$3F8 (preset: $3F8800)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
0
0
0
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 FIFZB3 FIFZB2 FIFZB1 FIFZB0 FIFZA3 FIFZA2 FIFZA1 FIFZA0  
SYG3 to SYG0: These simultaneously set the focus drive, tracking drive and sled drive output gains. See  
the $AF and $CX commands for the spindle drive output gain setting.  
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0  
GAIN  
0 (– dB)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0.125 (–18.1dB)  
0.250 (–12.0dB)  
0.375 (–8.5dB)  
0.500 (–6.0dB)  
0.625 (–4.1dB)  
0.750 (–2.5dB)  
0.875 (–1.2dB)  
1.000 (0.0dB)  
1.125 (+1.0dB)  
1.250 (+1.9dB)  
1.375 (+2.8dB)  
1.500 (+3.5dB)  
1.625 (+4.2dB)  
1.750 (+4.9dB)  
1.875 (+5.5dB)  
: preset  
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0:  
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from high to low.  
FIFZA3 to FIFZA0:  
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from low to high.  
The FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting values are valid only when $3A  
FIFZC is "1".  
Set so that the FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.  
Hysteresis can be added to the slice level by setting FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 < FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.  
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 or FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting value  
FZC slice level =  
× 0.5 × VDD [V]  
32  
– 192 –  
CXD3048R  
$3F9 (preset: $3F9000)  
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10  
D9  
0
D8  
1
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
1
0
0
1
FSUD FFSUP  
FFS5 FFS4 FFS3 FFS2 FFS1 FFS0  
FSUD, FFSUP: These set the focus search type.  
The focus search is started by the $47 command.  
FSUD FFSUP  
Focus search type  
The usual focus search is performed.  
0
0
0
1
UP search is performed, and the focus servo is turned on at the FZC  
falling edge.  
Do not set.  
When the upper limit value is reached during the focus search, the  
focus search stops. After that, when the lower limit value is reached  
UP/DOWN search is performed.  
1
1
0
1
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.  
When the lower limit value is reached during the focus search, the  
focus search stops. After that, when the upper limit value is reached  
UP/DOWN search is performed.  
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.  
: preset  
FFS5 to FFS0: These set the focus search amplitude voltage. Valid only when FSUD = 1.  
FFS5 to FFS0 setting values  
Focus search amplitude = (1 ±  
) × 0.5 × VDD [V]  
64  
– 193 –  
CXD3048R  
Description of Data Readout  
64  
32  
16  
8
1
SOCK  
(5.6448MHz)  
...  
...  
XOLT  
(88.2kHz)  
MSB  
LSB  
8-bit data  
9-bit data  
MSB  
MSB  
LSB  
SOUT  
LSB  
16-bit data  
16-bit register  
for serial/parallel  
conversion  
16-bit register  
for latch  
SOUT  
LSB  
LSB  
To the 7-segment LED  
·
·
·
·
·
·
To the 7-segment LED  
MSB  
CLK  
MSB  
SOCK  
XOLT  
CLK  
Data is connected to the 7-segment LED  
by 4-bits at a time. This enables Hex  
display using four 7-segment LEDs.  
SOUT  
Serial data input  
D/A  
Analog  
output  
To an oscilloscope, etc.  
SOCK  
XOLT  
Clock input  
Offset adjustment,  
gain adjustment  
Latch enable input  
Waveforms can be monitored with an oscilloscope using a serial  
input-type D/A converter as shown above.  
– 194 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients  
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (1)>  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
CONTENTS  
K00  
K01  
K02  
K03  
K04  
K05  
K06  
K07  
K08  
K09  
K0A  
K0B  
K0C  
K0D  
K0E  
K0F  
E0  
81  
23  
7F  
6A  
10  
14  
30  
7F  
46  
81  
1C  
7F  
58  
82  
7F  
SLED INPUT GAIN  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
SLED OUTPUT GAIN  
FOCUS INPUT GAIN  
SLED AUTO GAIN  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A  
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
K10  
K11  
K12  
K13  
K14  
K15  
K16  
K17  
K18  
K19  
K1A  
K1B  
K1C  
K1D  
K1E  
K1F  
4E  
32  
20  
30  
80  
77  
80  
77  
00  
F1  
7F  
3B  
81  
44  
7F  
5E  
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN  
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN  
FOCUS AUTO GAIN  
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A  
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A  
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B  
Fix  
TRACKING INPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A  
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
K20  
K21  
K22  
K23  
K24  
K25  
K26  
K27  
K28  
K29  
K2A  
K2B  
K2C  
K2D  
K2E  
K2F  
82  
44  
18  
30  
7F  
46  
81  
3A  
7F  
66  
82  
44  
4E  
1B  
00  
00  
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN  
TRACKING AUTO GAIN  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
Not used  
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.  
– 195 –  
CXD3048R  
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (2)>  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
CONTENTS  
K30  
K31  
K32  
K33  
K34  
K35  
K36  
K37  
K38  
K39  
K3A  
K3B  
K3C  
K3D  
K3E  
K3F  
80  
66  
00  
7F  
6E  
20  
7F  
3B  
80  
44  
7F  
77  
86  
0D  
57  
00  
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)  
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B  
Not used  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H  
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L  
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H  
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A  
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B  
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
K40  
K41  
K42  
K43  
K44  
K45  
K46  
04  
7F  
7F  
79  
17  
6D  
00  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)  
Not used  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L  
K47  
K48  
K49  
K4A  
K4B  
K4C  
K4D  
K4E  
K4F  
00  
02  
7F  
7F  
79  
17  
54  
00  
00  
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN  
Not used  
Not used  
– 196 –  
§5-20. Filter Composition  
The internal filter composition is shown below.  
K
: Coefficient RAM address, M : Data RAM address  
FCS Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz  
M1F  
M1E  
FCS  
AUTO Gain  
To FCS  
Hold  
To FCS  
Hold  
K0F  
M04  
K0F  
M05  
FCS  
DFCT  
Hold Reg2  
M03  
Z –1  
2–1  
M06  
Z –1  
M07  
K06  
K06  
K11  
K13  
FCS  
In Reg  
Z –1  
K09  
Z –1  
AGFON  
Sin ROM  
K08  
K0A  
K0B  
K0C  
K0D  
K0E  
K10  
2 –7  
2 –7  
27  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients to "0".  
FCS Servo Gain Down fs = 88.2kHz  
M1F  
M1E  
FSC  
AUTO Gain  
To FCS  
Hold  
To FCS  
Hold  
K2B  
M04  
K2B  
M05  
FCS  
DFCT  
Hold Reg2  
2–1  
M06  
Z –1  
M07  
M03  
Z –1  
K2D  
K13  
K06  
FCS  
In Reg  
Z –1  
K25  
Z –1  
K28  
K29  
K2A  
K2C  
K24  
K26  
K27  
2–7  
2 –7  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients to "0".  
FPGS1, 0  
FPS1, 0  
BK3  
BK6  
PWM  
Z –1  
Z –1  
BK2  
Z –1  
Z –1  
FCS SRCH  
BK5  
BK1  
BK4  
TRK Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
To SLD Servo,  
TRK Hold  
TRK  
Hold Reg  
DFCT  
2–1  
M0B  
M0C  
Z –1  
M0D  
Z –1  
M0E  
Z –1  
M0F  
K19  
K22  
K23  
TRK  
In Reg  
Z –1  
AGTON  
Sin ROM  
K1B  
K1C  
K1A  
K1E  
K1F  
K19  
K20  
K21  
2 –7  
2 –7  
K1D  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficients to "0".  
TRK Servo Gain Up1 fs = 88.2kHz  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
TRK  
Hold Reg  
DFCT  
27  
M0B  
M0C  
Z –1  
K1B  
M0E  
Z –1  
K3D  
M0F  
2 –1  
K19  
K23  
K3E  
TRK  
In Reg  
Z –1  
K1A  
K3C  
TRK Servo Gain Up2 fs = 88.2kHz  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
TRK  
Hold Reg  
DFCT  
2–1  
M0E  
Z –1  
M0F  
M0B  
Z –1  
M0C  
Z –1  
M0D  
Z –1  
K19  
K3E  
K23  
TRK  
In Reg  
K37  
K38  
K3A  
K3C  
K3D  
K36  
2 –7  
2 –7  
K39  
K3B  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients to "0".  
TPS1, 0  
TPGS1, 0  
BK6  
BK3  
PWM  
BK9  
Z–1  
Z–1  
Z –1  
Z–1  
BK5  
Z –1  
BK7  
Z –1  
BK8  
TRK JMP  
BK1  
BK2  
BK4  
FCS Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EAXX0)  
M1F  
M1E  
FCS  
AUTO Gain  
To FCS  
Hold  
To FCS  
Hold  
K0F  
M05  
K0F  
M04  
FCS  
Hold Reg 2  
DFCT  
2–1  
M06  
Z –1  
M07  
M03  
Z –1  
K13  
K06  
K06  
K11  
FCS  
In Reg  
Z –1  
Z –1  
AGFON  
Sin ROM  
K0A  
K0B  
7FH  
K09  
K0C  
K0D  
81H  
K08  
80H  
K0E  
K10  
2–7  
2–7  
2 –7  
2
2–7  
27  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients during normal operation, and of the K0B, K09 and K0E coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".  
FCS Servo Gain Down; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3E5XX0)  
M1F  
M1E  
FCS  
AUTO Gain  
To FCS  
Hold  
To FCS  
Hold  
K2B  
M04  
K2B  
M05  
FCS  
Hold Reg 2  
DFCT  
2 –1  
M03  
Z –1  
M06  
Z –1  
M07  
K06  
K13  
K2D  
FCS  
In Reg  
Z –1  
Z –1  
K26  
K27  
K28  
K29  
80H  
K2A  
K2C  
81H  
K24  
7FH  
K25  
2 –7  
2–7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2–7  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients during normal operation, and of the K24, K25 and K2A coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".  
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values  
when set to quasi double accuracy.  
FPS1, 0  
FPGS1, 0  
BK3  
BK6  
PWM  
Z –1  
Z –1  
Z –1  
Z –1  
FCS SRCH  
BK1  
BK2  
BK4  
BK5  
TRK Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EXAX0)  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
TRK  
Hold Reg  
DFCT  
M0B  
Z –1  
M0C  
Z–1  
M0D  
Z –1  
M0E  
Z –1  
M0F  
2–1  
K22  
K23  
K19  
K19  
TRK  
In Reg  
AGTON  
Sin ROM  
81H  
K1A  
7FH  
K1C  
K1D  
K1E  
K1F  
80H  
K21  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
K1B  
K20  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficirnts during normal operation, and of the K1A, K1B and K20 coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".  
TRK Servo Gain Up1; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
TRK  
DFCT  
Hold Reg  
27  
M0B  
Z –1  
M0C  
Z –1  
M0E  
Z –1  
M0F  
2–1  
K19  
K3E  
K23  
TRK  
In Reg  
81H  
K1A  
7FH  
80H  
K3C  
K3D  
2 –7  
2–7  
2 –7  
K1B  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1A, K1B and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".  
TRK Servo Gain Up2; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)  
TRK  
AUTO Gain  
TRK  
DFCT  
Hold Reg  
M0B  
Z –1  
M0C  
Z –1  
M0D  
Z –1  
M0E  
Z –1  
M0F  
2–1  
K19  
K3E  
K23  
TRK  
In Reg  
K3A  
K3B  
80H  
81H  
K36  
7FH  
K38  
K39  
K3D  
2–7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2 –7  
2–7  
K37  
K3C  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients during normal operation, and of the K36, K37 and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".  
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values  
when set to quasi double accuracy.  
TPS1, 0  
TPGS1, 0  
BK3  
BK6  
BK9  
PWM  
Z –1  
BK2  
Z –1  
Z –1  
Z –1  
BK5  
Z –1  
Z –1  
BK8  
TRK JMP  
BK1  
BK4  
BK7  
CXD3048R  
SLD Servo fs = 345Hz  
TRK SERVO FILTER  
Secont-stage output  
TRK  
K30  
K00  
SFSK (only when TGup2 is used.)  
M00  
AUTO Gain  
M0D  
SFID  
27  
M01  
Z –1  
M02  
K05  
K07  
2–1  
PWM  
SLD  
In Reg  
Z –1  
SLD MOV  
K03  
K04  
K01  
2–7  
2–7  
K02  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K02 and K04 coefficients to "0".  
HPTZC/Auto Gain fs = 88.2kHz  
2–1  
FCS  
In Reg  
Slice  
TZC Reg  
AGFON  
2–1  
M08  
Z –1  
M09  
Z –1  
M0A  
Z –1  
AUTO Gain  
Reg  
Slice  
TRK  
In Reg  
AGTON  
AGFON  
Sin ROM  
K15  
K14  
K17  
– 201 –  
CXD3048R  
Anti Shock fs = 88.2kHz  
2–1  
M08  
Z –1  
M09  
Z –1  
M0A  
Z –1  
TRK  
In Reg  
Anti Shock  
Reg  
K35  
K12  
Comp  
K31  
K16  
K33  
K34  
2 –7  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K34 coefficient to "0".  
The comparator level is 1/16 the maximum amplitude of the comparator input.  
AVRG fs = 88.2kHz  
2–1  
2 –7  
M08  
Z –1  
VC, TE, FE,  
RFDC  
AVRG Reg  
TRK Hold fs = 345Hz  
TRK SERVO FILTER  
Second-stage output  
K46  
THSK (only when TGup2 is used.)  
M18  
M0D  
THID  
M19  
Z –1  
TRK  
Hold Reg  
K45  
2 –1  
K40  
SLD  
In Reg  
Z –1  
K41  
K43  
K44  
2 –7  
2 –7  
K42  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K42 and K44 coefficients to "0".  
FCS Hold fs = 345Hz  
FCS SERVO FILTER  
First-stage output  
M1F  
M1E  
K2B when using the  
FCS Gain Down filter  
K2B  
DFIS  
($3E)  
M04  
M10  
Z–1  
M11  
Z–1  
M12  
FCS  
Hold Reg 2  
K4D  
K48  
K0F  
M05  
FCS SERVO FILTER  
Second-stage output  
K49  
K4B  
K4C  
2–7  
2–7  
K4A  
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K4A and K4C coefficients to "0".  
– 202 –  
CXD3048R  
§5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response  
Tracking frequency response  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
180˚  
90˚  
NORMAL  
GAIN UP  
G
0˚  
φ
–90˚  
–10  
–180˚  
20k  
2.1  
10  
100  
1k  
f – Frequency [Hz]  
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.  
Focus frequency response  
40  
180˚  
NORMAL  
GAIN DOWN  
30  
20  
10  
0
90˚  
0˚  
G
φ
–90˚  
–180˚  
–10  
2.1  
10  
100  
1k  
20k  
f – Frequency [Hz]  
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.  
– 203 –  
[6] Application Circuit  
TD  
FD  
VCC  
GND  
RFO  
FZC  
FE  
90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
V
SS1  
91  
92  
SE  
FE  
VC  
TE  
TEST  
TES1  
CE  
93  
VC  
AVDD  
2
94  
V
SS2  
AOUT2  
VREFR  
95  
FRDR  
FFDR  
TRDR  
TFDR  
SRDR  
SFDR  
SSTP  
MDS  
96  
AVSS  
AVSS  
2
1
97  
Vcc  
98  
Driver setting  
SSTP  
SLED  
SPDL  
GND  
VREFL  
AOUT1  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
AVDD  
1
XVSS  
XTAO  
XTAI  
MDS  
C176  
MDP  
C176  
XVDD  
HVDD  
HPR  
V
DD2  
CXD3048R  
LRCK  
LRCKI  
PCMD  
PCMDI  
BCK  
BCKI  
DVDD  
A3  
HPL  
HVSS  
XTSL  
EXCK  
SBSO  
XWIH  
XEMP  
SQSO  
SCLK  
SQCK  
SBSO  
A2  
A1  
A0  
V
CC  
SS  
A10  
V
V
SS0  
A11  
XRAS  
XCAS  
R4M  
R4M  
TEST3  
TEST4  
XWRE  
XWE  
XOE  
A11 to A0  
D3 to D0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30  
4M DRAM or 16M DRAM  
Application circuits shown are typical examples illustrating the operation of the devices. Sony cannot  
assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits or for any infringement of  
third party patent and other right due to same.  
CXD3048R  
Package Outline  
Unit: mm  
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)  
18.0 ± 0.2  
16.0 ± 0.1  
1.7 MAX  
SCT A'ssy  
1.4 ± 0.1  
S
90  
61  
0.1  
S
91  
60  
B
A
120  
31  
1
30  
M
0.5  
0.22 ± 0.05  
0.1  
S
0.1 ± 0.05  
0.22 ± 0.05  
(0.2)  
0.25  
0˚ to 10˚  
DETAIL  
A
DETAIL  
B
PACKAGE STRUCTURE  
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS  
EPOXY RESIN  
PACKAGE MATERIAL  
LEAD TREATMENT  
LEAD MATERIAL  
ITEM  
SPEC.  
COPPER ALLOY  
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%  
5-18µm  
SOLDER PLATING  
SONY CODE  
EIAJ CODE  
LQFP-120P-L01  
LEAD MATERIAL  
LQFP120-P-1616  
COPPER ALLOY  
0.8g  
SOLDER COMPOSITION  
PLATING THICKNESS  
JEDEC CODE  
PACKAGE MASS  
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)  
18.0 ± 0.2  
16.0 ± 0.1  
1.7MAX  
1.4 ± 0.1  
Renesas A'ssy  
90  
61  
91  
60  
B
A
120  
31  
1
30  
0.5  
0.10  
S
b
0.10  
M
S
0.25  
0.1 ± 0.05  
S
b=0.22 ± 0.05  
(0.2)  
0˚ to 10˚  
DETAIL B  
PACKAGE STRUCTURE  
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS  
DETAIL A  
PACKAGE MATERIAL  
LEAD TREATMENT  
LEAD MATERIAL  
EPOXY RESIN  
ITEM  
SPEC.  
COPPER ALLOY  
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%  
5-18µm  
SONY CODE  
EIAJ CODE  
LQFP-120P-L051  
P-LQFP120-16x16-0.5  
SOLDER  
LEAD MATERIAL  
COPPER ALLOY  
0.8g  
SOLDER COMPOSITION  
PLATING THICKNESS  
JEDEC CODE  
PACKAGE MASS  
Sony Corporation  
– 205 –  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY